User Guide

Thank You for Choosing Ross

You've made a great choice. We expect you will be very happy with your purchase of Ross Technology.
Our mission is to:
1. Provide a Superior Customer Experience
• offer the best product quality and support
2. Make Cool Practical Technology
• develop great products that customers love
Ross has become well known for the Ross Video Code of Ethics. It guides our interactions and
empowers our employees. I hope you enjoy reading it below.
If anything at all with your Ross experience does not live up to your expectations be sure to reach out to
us at [email protected].

David Ross
CEO, Ross Video
[email protected]

Ross Video Code of Ethics

Any company is the sum total of the people that make things happen. At Ross, our employees are a
special group. Our employees truly care about doing a great job and delivering a high quality customer
experience every day. This code of ethics hangs on the wall of all Ross Video locations to guide our
behavior:
1. We will always act in our customers’ best interest.
2. We will do our best to understand our customers’ requirements.
3. We will not ship crap.
4. We will be great to work with.
5. We will do something extra for our customers, as an apology, when something big goes wrong and
it's our fault.
6. We will keep our promises.
7. We will treat the competition with respect.
8. We will cooperate with and help other friendly companies.
9. We will go above and beyond in times of crisis. If there's no one to authorize the required action in
times of company or customer crisis - do what you know in your heart is right. (You may rent
helicopters if necessary.)
Ultricore · User Guide
• Ross Part Number: 2201DR-104-15
• Release Date: October 15, 2021.
• Software Issue: 4.7
The information contained in this Guide is subject to change without notice or obligation.

Copyright
©2021 Ross Video Limited, Ross®, and any related marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Ross Video Limited. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective companies. PATENTS ISSUED and PENDING. All rights reserved. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Ross Video. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation
of this document, Ross Video assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting
from the use of the information contained herein.

Patents
Patent numbers US 7,034,886; US 7,508,455; US 7,602,446; US 7,802,802 B2; US 7,834,886; US 7,914,332; US 8,307,284; US
8,407,374 B2; US 8,499,019 B2; US 8,519,949 B2; US 8,743,292 B2; GB 2,419,119 B; GB 2,447,380 B; and other patents pending.

Notice
The material in this manual is furnished for informational use only. It is subject to change without notice and should not be construed
as commitment by Ross Video Limited. Ross Video Limited assumes no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies that may
appear in this manual.

Safety Notices
Refer to the “Important Regulatory and Safety Notices” document that accompanied your product.

Statement of Compliance
This product has been determined to be compliant with the applicable standards, regulations, and directives for the countries where
the product is marketed.
Compliance documentation, such as certification or Declaration of Compliance for the product is available upon request by
contacting [email protected]. Please include the product; model number identifiers and serial number and country that
compliance information is needed in request.

EMC Notices
United States of America - FCC Part 15
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A Digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
Commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
Canada
This Class A device complies with Canadian ICES-003 and part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Cet appariel numerique de la classe “A” est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Notice — Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Ross Video Ltd. could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment.
European Union
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions established under regulation (EC) No
765/2008 and Decision No 768/2008/EC referred to as the “New Legislative Framework”.

Warning — This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR 32. In a residential environment this equipment may
cause radio interference.

Australia/New Zealand
This equipment is in compliance with the provisions established under the Radiocommunications Act 1992 and
Radiocommunications Labeling (Electromagnetic Compatibility) Notice 2008.
Korea
This equipment is in compliance with the provisions established under the Radio Waves Act.
Class A equipment (Broadcasting and communications service for business use).
This device is a business-use (Class A) EMC-compliant device. The seller and user are advised to be aware of this fact. This device is
intended for use in areas outside home.

Type of Equipment User’s Guide

ࢇ ̛̛Е ߶‫(ࡈה‬A̗) ࢷ࢕ળࢶଢ̛̛Ի۰ શ
A̗ ̛̛
֐࢕ ӖЕ ‫࢕ࡈی‬Е ࢇ ࢺࡶ ࣯ࢂଜ‫؂ ̛ݤ‬Ԃ
(߶‫)ࢢ࢕̛ݦ੼ܞ؏ ࡈה‬
ֲ, ɼࢽ࠹ࢂ एࠇ߾۰ ‫ࡈی‬ଜЕ ʨࡶ ּࢶࡳԻ
ଢТЬ.

Class A Equipment This equipment is Industrial (Class A)

(Industrial Broadcasting & electromagnetic wave suitability equipment and
Communication Equipment) seller or user should take notice of it, and this
equipment is to be used in the places except for home.

International
This equipment has been tested under the requirements of CISPR 22:2008 or CISPR 32:2015 and found to comply with the limits for
a Class A Digital device.

Notice — This is a Class A product. In domestic environments, this product may cause radio interference, in which
case the user may have to take adequate measures.

Warranty and Repair Policy

The Ultricore system is backed by a comprehensive one-year warranty on all components.

Notice — Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Ross Video Limited could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment.

If an item becomes defective within the warranty period Ross will repair or replace the defective item, as determined solely by Ross.
Warranty repairs will be conducted at Ross, with all shipping FOB Ross dock. If repairs are conducted at the customer site, reasonable
out-of-pocket charges will apply. At the discretion of Ross, and on a temporary loan basis, plug in circuit boards or other replacement
parts may be supplied free of charge while defective items undergo repair. Return packing, shipping, and special handling costs are
the responsibility of the customer.
This warranty is void if products are subjected to misuse, neglect, accident, improper installation or application, or unauthorized
modification.
In no event shall Ross Video Limited be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages (including loss of
profit). Implied warranties, including that of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are expressly limited to the duration
of this warranty.
This warranty is TRANSFERABLE to subsequent owners, subject to Ross’ notification of change of ownership.
Environmental Information
The equipment may contain hazardous substances that could impact health and the environment.
To avoid the potential release of those substances into the environment and to diminish the need for the extraction of natural
resources, Ross Video encourages you to use the appropriate take-back systems. These systems will reuse or recycle most of the
materials from your end-of-life equipment in an environmentally friendly and health conscious manner.
The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol invites you to use these systems.

If you need more information on the collection, reuse, and recycling systems, please contact your local or regional waste
administration. You can also contact Ross Video for more information on the environmental performances of our products.
This appliance may contain a Coin type battery which should not be treated as household waste.
To ensure that the battery will be treated properly use the appropriate take-back systems in your area. These systems will reuse or
recycle most of the materials from your end-of-life equipment in an environmentally friendly and health conscious manner.

Company Address
Ross Video Limited Ross Video Incorporated
8 John Street P.O. Box 880
Iroquois, Ontario Ogdensburg, New York
Canada, K0E 1K0 USA 13669-0880

General Business Office: (+1) 613  652  4886

Fax: (+1) 613  652  4425

Technical Support: (+1) 613  652  4886

After Hours Emergency: (+1) 613  349  0006

E-mail (Technical Support): [email protected]

E-mail (General Information): [email protected]
Website: http://www.rossvideo.com
 Contents
Introduction 15
Related Publications ............................................................................................................................................... 15
Documentation Conventions .................................................................................................................................. 16
Interface Elements ............................................................................................................................................... 16
User Entered Text ............................................................................................................................................... 16
Referenced Guides .............................................................................................................................................. 16
Menu Sequences .................................................................................................................................................. 16
Important Instructions ......................................................................................................................................... 16
Contacting Technical Support ................................................................................................................................ 16

Getting Started 19
General Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 19
Features ............................................................................................................................................................... 19
Typical System Equipment .................................................................................................................................... 20
Before You Begin .................................................................................................................................................. 21
Installation and Setup Overview ............................................................................................................................ 21
Implementing a System Plan ............................................................................................................................... 21
Establish Communications .................................................................................................................................. 21
Define the Routing System Database in Ultricore .............................................................................................. 22
Set up Virtual Control and Resource Management in Ultricore ......................................................................... 22
Configure the Soft Panels in Ultricore ................................................................................................................ 22

Hardware Overview 25
Front Panel Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 25
Rear Panel Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 26

Physical Installation 27
Before You Begin .................................................................................................................................................. 27
Mounting Requirements ......................................................................................................................................... 27
Connecting the Ultricore to a Network .................................................................................................................. 27
Connecting the Ultricore to Ross NK Series Devices ........................................................................................... 28
Connecting the Ultricore to a Serial Device .......................................................................................................... 29
Connecting to a Power Supply ............................................................................................................................... 29
Configuring the Loss of Power Alarm ................................................................................................................... 30

Basic Configuration 31
Getting Started ....................................................................................................................................................... 31
Launching DashBoard ........................................................................................................................................... 32
Using Walkabout to Assign an IP Address to the Ultricore Panel ........................................................................ 32
Adding the Ultricore to the Tree View in DashBoard ........................................................................................... 32
Accessing the Ultricore Interfaces in DashBoard .................................................................................................. 33
Configuring the Ultricore Mode ............................................................................................................................ 34
Overview ............................................................................................................................................................. 34
Assigning a Role to the Ultricore ........................................................................................................................ 34
Specifying the Time Source ................................................................................................................................... 35
Using an NTP Server as the Time Source ........................................................................................................... 35
Using the DashBoard Client Computer as the Time Source ............................................................................... 36
Reviewing the Network Settings for the Ultricore Panel ....................................................................................... 36
Re-naming the Ultricore ........................................................................................................................................ 37
Configuring Access for DashBoard Clients ........................................................................................................... 37

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Contents • i

 Software License Keys 39
Before You Begin ...................................................................................................................................................39
License Keys Overview .........................................................................................................................................39
Installing a License Key .........................................................................................................................................39
Removing a License Key .......................................................................................................................................40

Ultricore Profiles 41
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................41
Modes of Operation ................................................................................................................................................41
Creation and Management of User Credentials ..................................................................................................41
Creation and Management of User Profiles via the Default Role Profiles Only .................................................42
Full Creation, Customization and Management of User Profiles .......................................................................42
Ultricore Profiles Interface .....................................................................................................................................42
Accessing the Ultricore Profiles Interface ...........................................................................................................42
Overview .............................................................................................................................................................43
Creating a Database of Users .................................................................................................................................44
Creating a Profile ...................................................................................................................................................44
Defining the Permissions for a Profile ...................................................................................................................46
Overview .............................................................................................................................................................46
Enabling the Ultricore Profiles Feature ..................................................................................................................47
Application of the Ultricore Profiles ......................................................................................................................47
User Data Import/Export ........................................................................................................................................48

Configuring the Ports 49

Updating the Network Settings for the Ultricore ...................................................................................................49

Device Communication Setup 51

Ultricore Communications Overview ....................................................................................................................51
Device Discovery in DashBoard .........................................................................................................................51
Communications between Ultricore and the Devices in a Routing System ........................................................51
Connecting to an Ultrix Router ..............................................................................................................................51
General Work Flow .............................................................................................................................................52
Setup Notes ..........................................................................................................................................................52
Adding a Connection Point .................................................................................................................................52
Deleting a Connection Point ................................................................................................................................53
Connecting to Ross Ethernet Devices ....................................................................................................................54
Connecting to Ross NK Series Devices .................................................................................................................55
Connecting to Ross NK Series Devices via T-Bus ................................................................................................56
Connecting to Ross Remote Control Panels ..........................................................................................................56
RCP-NK Series Panels ........................................................................................................................................56
RCP-ME and RCP-QE Panels .............................................................................................................................57
Connecting to Third-Party Devices ........................................................................................................................57
Overview .............................................................................................................................................................57
Incoming Ethernet Connections ..........................................................................................................................57
Outgoing Ethernet Connections ..........................................................................................................................58
Defining a Serial Connection ..............................................................................................................................59
Creating a Logical Matrix for an External Device ..............................................................................................60

Database Configuration 63
How a Database Determines the Routing System ..................................................................................................63
Configuration Overview .........................................................................................................................................63
Database File Management Overview ...................................................................................................................63
Creating a New Database .......................................................................................................................................64
Using the Database Builder .................................................................................................................................64
Using the Database Tab .......................................................................................................................................66

ii • Contents Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Loading a Database ................................................................................................................................................ 66
Defining the Levels in a Database ......................................................................................................................... 67
Before You Begin ............................................................................................................................................... 67
Defining the Destinations in a Database ................................................................................................................ 69
Specifying a Destination Label ........................................................................................................................... 70
Mapping an Output to a Destination ................................................................................................................... 71
Configuring the Destination Follow Feature ...................................................................................................... 72
Defining the Sources in a Database ....................................................................................................................... 73
Specifying a Label for a Source .......................................................................................................................... 73
Mapping an Input to a Source ................................................................................................................................ 74
Using the Advanced Fill Tool ................................................................................................................................ 75
Create Source Labels with Assignments for SDI Video Levels ......................................................................... 75
Create Destination Labels with Assignments for SDI Video Levels .................................................................. 77
Create Source Labels with Assignments for SDI and Embedded Audio ............................................................ 78
Creating Labels with Assignments for SDI and Embedded Audio, with Audio Breakaways ............................ 80
Creating Categories ................................................................................................................................................ 82
Managing your Databases ...................................................................................................................................... 82
Overview ............................................................................................................................................................. 82
Exporting a Database .......................................................................................................................................... 82
Importing a Database .......................................................................................................................................... 83
Deleting a Database ............................................................................................................................................... 83

Tallies 85
Tally Types ......................................................................................................................................................... 85
Tally ID Format .................................................................................................................................................. 85
Router Tally Output Operation .............................................................................................................................. 86
Router Status over TSL UMD v3.1 Operation .................................................................................................... 86
Getting Started ....................................................................................................................................................... 87
Adding a Serial Connection Point .......................................................................................................................... 87
Adding an Ethernet Connection Point ................................................................................................................... 87
Enabling Tally ID Support ..................................................................................................................................... 87
Enabling Tally ID Support in the Active Database ............................................................................................. 87
Defining the Status Level for Tally Operation .................................................................................................... 87
Assigning the Tally IDs to the Sources .................................................................................................................. 88
Assigning the Tally IDs to the Destinations .......................................................................................................... 88

Using Categories 91
Group Categories Overview .................................................................................................................................. 91
Configuring Group Categories ............................................................................................................................... 93
Creating Group Names ........................................................................................................................................ 93
Auto Generating the Groups ............................................................................................................................... 95
Assigning Resources to a Group ......................................................................................................................... 96
Managing the Groups .......................................................................................................................................... 98
Cat/Index Categories Overview ............................................................................................................................. 99
Configuring a Cat/Index Category Setup ............................................................................................................. 100
Assigning Categories ........................................................................................................................................ 100
Assigning Indexes ............................................................................................................................................. 102
Assigning Index Filters ..................................................................................................................................... 102
Legacy Categories Overview ............................................................................................................................... 103
Configuring Legacy Categories ........................................................................................................................... 104
Category Direct Selection Mode ....................................................................................................................... 104
Numerical Index Entry Mode ............................................................................................................................ 104
Creating a Soft Panel with Categories ................................................................................................................. 105

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Contents • iii

 Soft Panels in DashBoard 107
Before You Begin .................................................................................................................................................107
Soft Panels Overview ...........................................................................................................................................107
Enabling Machine Control ................................................................................................................................108
Creating a Soft Panel ............................................................................................................................................108
Levels for the Soft Panel ...................................................................................................................................110
Destinations for the Soft Panel ..........................................................................................................................111
Sources for the Soft Panel .................................................................................................................................112
Salvos for the Soft Panel ...................................................................................................................................112
Copying a Soft Panel .........................................................................................................................................113
Editing a Soft Panel ...........................................................................................................................................114
Deleting a Soft Panel from the Database ...........................................................................................................114
Using the Lock and Protect Features ....................................................................................................................115
Using a Lock .....................................................................................................................................................115
Using a Protect ..................................................................................................................................................115
Using Matrix Panels .............................................................................................................................................116
Panel Interface Overview ..................................................................................................................................116
Crosspoint Switches via a Matrix Panel ...............................................................................................................117
Using a Default Preset .......................................................................................................................................120
Creating an Automatic Switching Loop ............................................................................................................121
Clearing the Matrix Selections ..........................................................................................................................122
Using MultiBus Panels .........................................................................................................................................122
Panel Interface Overview ..................................................................................................................................122
Crosspoint Switches via a MultiBus Panel ..........................................................................................................123
Using the Multi Select Function ........................................................................................................................125
Using Category Panels .........................................................................................................................................125
Panel Interface Overview ..................................................................................................................................126
Crosspoint Switches via a Category Panel ........................................................................................................127
Using Push Button Panels ....................................................................................................................................129
Panel Interface Overview ..................................................................................................................................129
Configuring a Push Button Soft Panel ..............................................................................................................131
Crosspoint Switches via a Push Button Panel ...................................................................................................132
Using an Ultritouch PB Panel ..............................................................................................................................134

Using Salvos 137

Creating Salvos ....................................................................................................................................................137
Saving the Current Crosspoint Status as a New Salvo ......................................................................................139
Copying and Pasting a Salvo ................................................................................................................................141
Editing a Salvo .....................................................................................................................................................141
Deleting a Salvo ...................................................................................................................................................142
Recalling a Salvo ..................................................................................................................................................142

Operation with Ross Devices 145

Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................145
Ross RCP-NK Series Remote Control Panels ...................................................................................................148
Ross NK Series Routers ....................................................................................................................................148
Integrating Ross NK Series Devices with Ultricore .............................................................................................148
Adding Ross NK Series Routers to the Ultricore Routing System ...................................................................148
Integrating Ross RCP-ME/RCP-QE Panels with Ultricore .................................................................................149
Adding a Ross RCP-ME or RCP-QE Panel to the Ultricore Routing System ..................................................149
Machine-Control (RS-422) Logical Mapping ......................................................................................................150
Conditions for Machine Control ........................................................................................................................150
Configuring T-Bus Devices .................................................................................................................................150
Adding an NK-IPS Connection to Ultricore .....................................................................................................150
Operation with an Ultrix Router ...........................................................................................................................151

iv • Contents Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 System Integration Examples 153
Adding Ultricore to Legacy Systems ................................................................................................................... 153
Integrating Third Party Routers with an Existing System ................................................................................... 155
Integrating Routers with a Third Party Control System ...................................................................................... 156
Adding Third Party Control to Existing Systems ................................................................................................ 157
Monitoring of the Routing System and Communications ................................................................................... 158
Replacing an NK-IPS ........................................................................................................................................... 159
Replacing an NK-3RD ......................................................................................................................................... 160

External Control 161

Ultricore Control with Third-Party Systems ........................................................................................................ 161
Ethernet Communication .................................................................................................................................. 161
Serial Communication ....................................................................................................................................... 161
Third-Party Matrix Control with Ultricore .......................................................................................................... 161
Create an Outgoing Connection Point .............................................................................................................. 161
Defining the External Matrix ............................................................................................................................ 162
Mapping the External Matrix Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................. 163
Using Index Numbers .......................................................................................................................................... 163
Protocol Options .................................................................................................................................................. 163
GVG Series 7000 Native Protocol Commands .................................................................................................... 163
RossTalk Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 165
Probel SW-P-08 Protocol Commands ................................................................................................................. 166
NVISION Commands .......................................................................................................................................... 168
NVISION NP16 Ethernet Protocol ................................................................................................................... 169
NVISION NP0010 Serial Protocol ................................................................................................................... 170
TSL UMD Protocol v3.1 Commands .................................................................................................................. 170
Protocol Implementation ................................................................................................................................... 171
TSL UMD Protocol v4.0 Commands .................................................................................................................. 171
Protocol Implementation ................................................................................................................................... 171
TSL UMD Protocol v5.0 Commands .................................................................................................................. 172
Protocol Implementation ................................................................................................................................... 173
Probel SW-P-08 Serial Protocol Commands ....................................................................................................... 174
Enabling SNMP Support ...................................................................................................................................... 174
Enabling SNMP Support ................................................................................................................................... 175
Configuring the SNMP Agent using DashBoard .............................................................................................. 175
Ember+ Registration and Discovery .................................................................................................................... 176
Establishing a Connection ................................................................................................................................. 176
Specifying the Operation Mode ........................................................................................................................ 176
Supported Commands ....................................................................................................................................... 177

Monitoring 179
Enabling Logging for the Ultricore ...................................................................................................................... 179
Monitoring the Network Status ............................................................................................................................ 179
Forcing an Ethernet Failover Switch ................................................................................................................. 179
Monitoring the Ultricore Mode Status ................................................................................................................. 180
Primary Status ................................................................................................................................................... 180
Client Status ...................................................................................................................................................... 180
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................ 180
Using the System Logs in DashBoard ................................................................................................................. 180
Saving the Current Settings for the Ultricore ...................................................................................................... 181
Monitoring the Devices in a Routing System ...................................................................................................... 181
Monitoring via the Front Panel ............................................................................................................................ 182
Navigating the Menus ....................................................................................................................................... 182
Monitoring the Ethernet LEDs on the Rear Panel ............................................................................................... 182
Upgrading the Software ....................................................................................................................................... 183

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Contents • v

 DashBoard Interface Overview 185
Ultricore in DashBoard ........................................................................................................................................185
Terminology ......................................................................................................................................................186
System Status Interfaces .......................................................................................................................................186
Status Tabs ........................................................................................................................................................186
Configuration Tabs ............................................................................................................................................187
Database Interfaces ..............................................................................................................................................191
Database Builder ...............................................................................................................................................192
Connections Tab ................................................................................................................................................196
Third Party Matrices Tab ..................................................................................................................................199
Port Labels Tab .................................................................................................................................................200
Levels Tab .........................................................................................................................................................201
Destinations Tab ................................................................................................................................................202
Sources Tab .......................................................................................................................................................203
Cat/Index Categories Tab ..................................................................................................................................204
Group Categories Tab .......................................................................................................................................206
Legacy Categories Tab ......................................................................................................................................207
Salvos Tab .........................................................................................................................................................208
Ultricore Profiles Tab ........................................................................................................................................209
Panels Tab .........................................................................................................................................................211
Destination Follow Tab .....................................................................................................................................216
Additional Dialogs, Menus, and Toolbars in the Database Interfaces ..............................................................216
Advanced Fill Tool ............................................................................................................................................218
Devices Interface ..................................................................................................................................................221
Frame Configuration Interface ..........................................................................................................................221
Controllers and Matrices ...................................................................................................................................222
Panels .................................................................................................................................................................222
Soft Panels Interfaces ...........................................................................................................................................222
Matrix Panel ......................................................................................................................................................223
MultiBus Panel ..................................................................................................................................................224
Category Panel ..................................................................................................................................................226
Ultritouch PB Panels .........................................................................................................................................227
Push Button Panels ............................................................................................................................................227
Using Walkabout in DashBoard ...........................................................................................................................228

Technical Specifications 229

Ethernet Ports .......................................................................................................................................................229
Specifications ....................................................................................................................................................229
ALARM Connector ..............................................................................................................................................229
Specifications ....................................................................................................................................................229
Pinouts ...............................................................................................................................................................229
Serial Ports ...........................................................................................................................................................230
Specifications ....................................................................................................................................................230
Pinouts ...............................................................................................................................................................230
T-Bus Ports ...........................................................................................................................................................231
Specifications ....................................................................................................................................................231
Pinouts ...............................................................................................................................................................231
Power ....................................................................................................................................................................232

Software Licenses 233

BSD ......................................................................................................................................................................233
Dual GPL ..............................................................................................................................................................233
GPL ......................................................................................................................................................................233
LGPL ....................................................................................................................................................................239
MIT .......................................................................................................................................................................240

vi • Contents Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 zlib ........................................................................................................................................................................ 240

Glossary 243

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Contents • vii

viii • Contents Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Introduction
This guide covers the installation, configuration, and use of the Ultricore Central Controller in a routing system.
The following chapters are included:
• “Introduction” summarizes the guide and provides important terms, and conventions.
• “Getting Started” provides an overview for creating a routing system with Ultricore, and general information to
keep in mind before installing and configuring your Ultricore panel.
• “Hardware Overview” provides a basic introduction to the Ultricore front and rear panels.
• “Physical Installation” provides instructions for the basic physical installation of the Ultricore panel.
• “Basic Configuration” provides instructions for configuring the Ultricore network settings, displaying the
Ultricore nodes in DashBoard, and setting up your first database for the routing system.
• “Software License Keys” provides instructions for enabling licensed features of your Ultricore.
• “Ultricore Profiles” provides an introduction to the Ultricore Profiles for your routing matrix and includes
general information on managing those profiles.
• “Device Communication Setup” provides instructions for using Ultricore to establish connections with NK
Series devices, Ross Ethernet devices, and third-party devices in your routing system.
• “Database Configuration” provides instructions for defining the elements of your routing system database such
as matrices, levels, destinations, and sources.
• “Tallies” provides instructions on how to enable TSL UMD messages in the active database, and assign Tally
IDs to your sources and destinations.
• “Using Categories” describes how to assign each destination, source, and level, to a specific category in the
routing system database.
• “Soft Panels in DashBoard” provides instructions for creating virtual panels in Ultricore.
• “Using Salvos” describes how to create and recall a salvo using the options in DashBoard.
• “Operation with Ross Devices” provides general information for operating the Ultricore in a routing system
that also includes Ross NK Series devices.
• “System Integration Examples” provides generalized examples of integrating Ultricore into existing routing
systems.
• “External Control” lists the third-party protocol commands the Ultricore supports.
• “Monitoring” describes the alarms and status indicators in the DashBoard interface for the Ultricore. General
information is also provided on the Ethernet port LEDs.
• “DashBoard Interface Overview” summarizes the functions, menus, and parameters of the Ultricore tabs and
windows in DashBoard.
• “Technical Specifications” provides the specifications for the Ultricore.
• “Software Licenses” provides third-party software license information for your Ultricore.
• “Glossary” provides a list of terms used throughout this guide.

Related Publications
It is recommended to consult the following Ross documentation before installing and configuring your Ultricore:
• DashBoard User Manual, Ross Part Number: 8351DR-004
• NK-NET User Guide, Ross Part Number: 2201DR-002
• NK-IPS User Guide, Ross Part Number: 9807DR-1020
• NK Series User Guide, Ross Part Number: 9807DR-0100
• RCP-ME User Guide, Ross Part Number: 2201DR-200

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Introduction • 15

 • RCP-QE User Guide, Ross Part Number: 2201DR-201
• Ultricore Quick Start Guide, Ross Part Number: 2201DR-102
• Ultrix Installation Guide, Ross Part Number: 2101DR-003
• Ultrix User Guide, Ross Part Number: 2101DR-004
• Walkabout Application Note, Ross Part Number: 2201DR-003

Documentation Conventions
Special text formats are used in this guide to identify parts of the user interface, text that a user must enter, or a
sequence of menus and sub-menus that must be followed to reach a particular command.

Interface Elements
Bold text is used to identify a user interface element such as a dialog box, menu item, or button. For example:
In the Edit dialog, click Insert Above.

User Entered Text

Courier text is used to identify text that a user must enter. For example:
In the Language box, enter English.

Referenced Guides
Italic text is used to identify the titles of referenced guides, manuals, or documents. For example:
For more information, refer to the Ultrix User Guide.

Menu Sequences
Menu arrows are used in procedures to identify a sequence of menu items that you must follow. For example, if a
step reads “File > Save As,” you would click the File menu and then click Save As.

Important Instructions
Star icons are used to identify important instructions or features. For example:
 Contact your IT department before connecting to your facility network to ensure that there are no conflicts. They
will provide you with an appropriate value for the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway for your device.

Contacting Technical Support

At Ross Video, we take pride in the quality of our products, but if problems occur, help is as close as the nearest
telephone.
Our 24-hour Hot Line service ensures you have access to technical expertise around the clock. After-sales service
and technical support is provided directly by Ross Video personnel. During business hours (Eastern Time),
technical support personnel are available by telephone. After hours and on weekends, a direct emergency technical
support phone line is available. If the technical support person who is on call does not answer this line immediately,

16 • Introduction Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 a voice message can be left and the call will be returned shortly. This team of highly trained staff is available to
react to any problem and to do whatever is necessary to ensure customer satisfaction.
• Technical Support: (+1) 613-652-4886
• After Hours Emergency: (+1) 613-349-0006
• E-mail: [email protected]
• Website: http://www.rossvideo.com

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Introduction • 17

18 • Introduction Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Getting Started
Ultricore alleviates the burden typically placed up on the user to partition, offset, and assign to levels the inputs and
outputs of the routers that will be part of the system. Ultricore’s user-friendly, graphical interface provides the tools
for easily handling those configuration issues and more at a system, rather than router, level.
If you have questions pertaining to the operation of Ultricore, please contact us at the numbers listed in the section
“Contacting Technical Support”. Our technical staff is always available for consultation, training, or service.

General Overview
Ultricore is the central system controller for Ross Video’s routing systems. It allows the connection of Ethernet
based routers and remote control panels, T-Bus based Ross NK Series routers and remote control panels, and
third-party automation systems.
By collating the potentially complex aspects of a system’s switching scheme, Ultricore allows for minimal
out-of-the-box configuration of routers. This not only makes it easier to initially setup a system, but it also makes it
easier to change configuration as needed.
The DashBoard client software enables you to monitor and control your Ross routing system components,
including Ultricore from a computer. DashBoard communicates with the Ross routing system through ethernet,
TCP, connections.

Features
Some features of the Ultricore include:
• SLP discovery or manual configuration of connection to DashBoard client software
• Client and server operation with client connection failover support
• Basic system crosspoint control and status monitoring via DashBoard
• Connections for redundant power supplies
• Alarm output with locking GP connector
• Dual Gigabit Ethernet interfaces
• T-Bus with looping connectors and power for native NK series connectivity
• Non-volatile memory for system recovery and logging
• Real-time clock
• Supports a maximum of 64 levels, with a maximum matrix of 4096 sources and 4096 destinations
• Dual configurable serial ports (RS-232 or RS-422)
• Front status display for system events
• Bi-directional Ethernet and Serial protocol support for the GVG Native protocol
• Supports the Probel SW-P-08 serial protocol
• Acts as a central system controller for up to 25 DashBoard clients and up to 50 hardware clients (routers, remote
control panels, third-party control systems, etc.)
• Supports links from the NK-IPS for legacy installed systems
• Supports NK-IPS pass-through type connection for direct NK device support
• Supports Virtual Routing, Matrix Partitioning, and Mapping
• Label support1

1. Ultricore does not support Unicode characters.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Getting Started • 19

 Typical System Equipment
Use Ultricore in typologies where routers and remote control panels are distributed throughout a facility. In this
scenario some of the routers and panel are physically located a great distance from the Ultricore. You would use
Ethernet connections to the Ultricore.
RCP-QE
Remote Control Panel
ETHERNET
PSU

ULTRIX-FR1
32x32 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
ENET 1 ! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT IN
Ultrix-HDBNC-IO
REF AUX A AUX B
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 4 A B
OUT IN

ENET 2 AUX A AUX B

Network Switch

Internet / LAN / VPN

PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4 PORT 5 PORT 6 PORT 7 PORT 8

PC running DashBoard

Ultricore
System Control and Interface
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

NK-3G-16
16x16 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

T-BUS VID REF INPUTS OUTPUTS

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

RCP-NKM Automation Device

Remote Control Panel Serial Protocol
PSU
T-BUS

NK-NET
T-BUS to Ethernet Adapter
ETHERNET
TBUS

NK-NET

NK Series Router
USB

USB
USB

USB

PORT 1

VIDREF

T-BUS

ALARM
GPI
GND
ALARM
+5V

Ethernet connection
Serial connection
T-Bus connection
Figure 2.1 Example of a Possible Routing System with Ultricore

20 • Getting Started Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Before You Begin
Before configuring and operating the Ultricore, you must first:
1. Download and install the latest version of the DashBoard client software. The DashBoard software and user
manual are available from our website.
 Contact your IT department before connecting to your facility network to ensure that there are no conflicts.
2. Connect your routers and panels to your facility network.
3. Launch DashBoard.
4. Ensure that your routers and remote control panels are available/visible in DashBoard.
For More Information on...
• downloading and installing DashBoard, refer to the DashBoard User Manual.
• planning and installing your routing system, refer to the user documentation that accompanied your devices.
• configuring the NK-NET, refer to the NK-NET User Guide.
• configuring the NK-IPS, refer to the NK-IPS User Guide.

Installation and Setup Overview

The generalized workflow of installing and configuring your Ultricore is:
1. Implement your routing system plan by installing the devices and configuring their network settings.
2. Use Walkabout to establish communications between Ultricore and DashBoard.
3. Ensure that DashBoard discovers the routing system and all its devices.
4. Configure individual device settings in DashBoard.
5. Define the routing system database using the options in the Ultricore interfaces in DashBoard.
6. Set up control panels.

Implementing a System Plan

Once the topology of the system has been decided with respect to routers, panels, connecting devices (NK-NET,
NK-IPS) etc. the components are connected and configured. Once all the Ross routing system components are
configured for network communication, the required information is entered into the Ultricore’s databases through
its DashBoard interfaces.
An example use topology would be a broadcast facility or studio where there are routers and panels distributed
throughout a building or a campus with the Ultricore collating the system’s components.
 Ultricore acts as a central system controller for up to 10 DashBoard clients and up to 50 hardware clients (routers
and/or remote control panels).

Establish Communications
Ultricore supports the Walkabout system for initial configuration of IP settings. Once you establish communications
over Ethernet between the Ultricore panel and DashBoard, you can proceed to use the interfaces in DashBoard that
enable Ultricore to communicate with the other devices in your routing system.
For More Information on...
• establishing a network connection to Ultricore, refer to the section “Using Walkabout to Assign an IP Address
to the Ultricore Panel” on page 32.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Getting Started • 21

 Define the Routing System Database in Ultricore
The Database interface in DashBoard for Ultricore enables you to create system input and output lists, assign those
signals to system sources and destinations, define multiple levels and matrices. You can create multiple databases,
each one with unique parameters, that are saved to the Ultricore panel memory. This provides the flexibility of
recalling a database and edit parameters as needed. You may wish to use the following process when defining the
database for your routing system.
 Ultricore supports a maximum of 64 levels, with a maximum matrix of 4096 sources and 4096 destinations.

Set up Define
Establish Define Core Define System Define Source
Connected Destination
Device Details System Settings Levels Labels
Devices Labels

Figure 2.2 Process for Configuring an Ultricore

 Ultricore does not support Unicode characters.

For More Information on...
• defining a database, refer to the section “Creating a New Database” on page 64.

Set up Virtual Control and Resource Management in Ultricore

Once your router connections are defined, and a database is established, you can start building a map of several
different physical devices that become one virtual device. When a switch request is made for a virtual device, all the
physical devices that are mapped to the virtual device are switched.
Ultricore enables you to map inputs and outputs from routers for control via any remote control panel. These
parameters can be saved to a database, enabling you to change configurations easily and quickly, allowing devices
to used in a number of different operating scenarios.

Configure the Soft Panels in Ultricore

There are seven types of soft panels available in the Ultricore interface:
• A Matrix panel displays the sources and destinations in a grid pattern, allowing you to quickly select a router,
then select which crosspoints to switch from, and perform a Take transition between the crosspoints.
• A MultiBus panel arranges the sources and destinations in separate crosspoint buses, but provides similar
controls as the Matrix panel.
• A Category panel displays the sources, destinations, and levels as defined by the CAT Index tags defined via the
Categories interface.
• A Category Index panel provides an interface for classic category/index selection. The various categories and
indexes are set via the Cat/Index category table within each database.
• A Group category panel provides a method of grouping dissimilarly named resources into functional selection
groups. The group assignments are set via the Group categories table within each database.
• A Push Button panel provides a button-per-source style panel in a grid layout.
• An UltritouchPB panel provides a button-per-source grid of buttons scaled to support Ultritouch panels.
• An UltritouchMV panel provides specific Ultriscape Multiviewer controls scaled for display on Ultritouch panel.

Operation
Once configured, the Ultricore provides central controller functionality for the routing system, including:
• the storage and implementation of routing system configurations, which collect a series of routing matrices into a
system and provide a logical database view of the whole system
• switching the physical crosspoints of the routers according to the system configuration

22 • Getting Started Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 • the control and system database interface for devices that control and/or display routing status (e.g. remote
control panels, switchers, master control, automation systems, multi-viewers, and tally systems)
• virtual routing, matrix partitioning, and mapping
• label support for protocols supporting labels
• system control through DashBoard
• connection and status logging
• client and server operation with client connection fail-over support

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Getting Started • 23

24 • Getting Started Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Hardware Overview
This chapter presents information on the Ultricore front and rear panels.

Front Panel Overview

The Ultricore front panel provides LEDs for monitoring the communication activity and power supply status of the
panel. An LCD display is also included for monitoring purposes.

IP:1###.###.##.###
2 3 4

Figure 3.1 Ultricore — Front Panel

1. Front Panel Wave Light

The front panel provides various system status indication via the 'wave light'. The concave section of the black
front panel bezel emits light of various colors to indicate system function.
Table 3.1 Front Panel Wave Light
Status Description
Blue pulsing to White When lit blue, this indicates normal operation.
Red When lit red, this indicates a serious issue that requires immediate attention.

2. LCD Display
The LCD display reports on the overall system status, IP address of the panel, and current fault conditions.
During normal operations, the display reports the Device Name (user assigned) and the active IP address of the
panel. Under some conditions, fault conditions are reported such as: device boot status, Walkabout locate mode
indication, SRAM battery warnings, and firmware upgrade states. The information on the display alternates
between normal operation and the error messages.
3. Navigation Positioner
The front panel includes a five-direction joystick that is used to navigate the Ultricore on the LCD Display. Refer
to the section “Monitoring via the Front Panel” on page 182 for details.
4. ETHERNET Port LEDs
Table 3.2 describes the Ultricore front panel LEDs that are used to monitor ethernet communication activity of
the Ultricore panel. When facing the front panel, the left LED reports the status of ETHERNET PORT 1 while
the right LED reports the status of ETHERNET PORT 2.

Table 3.2 Front Panel LEDs

LED Status Description
ETH# - ACT Bright Blue A valid physical ethernet connection is established, and the port is active.
There is data transfer activity on the indicated ETHERNET port.
Dim Blue A valid physical ethernet connection is established, but the port is not the
active one. There is no data transfer activity on the indicated Ethernet port.
Off No valid ethernet link to the indicated Ethernet port.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Hardware Overview • 25

 Rear Panel Overview
The Ultricore rear panel provides communication ports, two power supply ports, and an alarm condition general
purpose output.
For More Information on...
• the pinouts for the Ultricore rear panel connections, refer to the chapter “Technical Specifications” on page 229.
• the power specifications, refer to the section “Power” on page 232.

PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM
ETHERNET COM2

Figure 3.2 Ultricore — Rear Panel

1. PSU Ports
Two +15V DC power supply connections (PSU1, PSU2) are provided to connect to external brick power
supplies to the Ultricore panel.

Notice — The Ultricore automatically powers on when power is applied.

2. ALARM GPO
This contact closure connector is used to report an alarm where closed is a system fault, and open when the
system is running without errors.
3. ETHERNET Ports
Ultricore communicates over an Ethernet connection to routers, and other devices. PORT 1 is the primary
Ethernet connection for Ultricore. PORT 2 is the redundant (backup) Ethernet connection. The exact steps for
connecting to your facility via an ethernet network depends on the requirements defined by your IT Department.
4. T-BUS Ports
Each port provides a loop-through connection for Ross NK series communication. This enables communication
to legacy routers and remote control panels as part of the routing system.
5. COM Ports
There are two female DB-9 serial ports used to connect to third-party automation devices. Each port can be
configured for RS-232 or RS-422 serial communication. Uses these ports to connect to third-party automation
devices that will control the routing system.

26 • Hardware Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Physical Installation
If you have questions pertaining to the installation of Ultricore, please contact us at the numbers listed in the section
“Contacting Technical Support”. Our technical staff is always available for consultation, training, or service.

Before You Begin

These installation guidelines assume the following:
• The relevant Ross equipment is installed into a ventilated rack frame. The relative humidity in the environment
of the equipment should be <70% (non-condensing). The ambient temperature of the air entering the front panel
should not exceed 40°C (104°F), and should not fall below 0°C (32°F).
• The install location of the router should be accessible, dry, and dust-free.
• The socket/outlet should be installed near the equipment and be easily accessible.
• Valid IP addresses are assigned to the equipment.

Static Discharge
Throughout this chapter, please heed the following cautionary note:

ESD Susceptibility — Static discharge can cause serious damage to sensitive semiconductor
devices. Avoid handling circuit boards in high static environments such as carpeted areas and when
synthetic fiber clothing is worn. Always exercise proper grounding precautions when working on circuit
boards and related equipment.

Mounting Requirements
The Ultricore panel is designed for installation into a standard 19” equipment rack. It has integrated rack ears,
allowing it to be screwed in using standard screws and cage nuts.
The Ultricore panel mounts in the rack frame by means of four rack screws fastened through the front mounting
ears. This should normally be sufficient to carry the load, including the weight of accompanying cables.
Under some conditions, the ambient air temperature inside rack-mount cabinets can be greater than the ambient
temperatures within a room. For safe long term reliability, ensure the ambient air temperatures at the router front
intake are within the router’s specified operating temperature range. Adequate ventilation within a rack frame must
also be maintained.
For More Information on...
• the technical specifications for the Ultricore, refer to the chapter “Technical Specifications” on page 229.

Connecting the Ultricore to a Network

Each Ethernet port is a standard 10/100/1000 RJ45 Ethernet connector and is used to exchange data and
communicate with other devices in your router system.
 Contact your IT department before connecting to your facility network to ensure that there are no conflicts. They
will provide you with an appropriate value for the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway for your device.
The Ultricore is connected directly to your network so that it can interface with the devices and the computer
running the DashBoard client. After a physical connection is established, DashBoard is used to configure the
network settings for the Ultricore.
For More Information on...
• downloading and installing DashBoard, refer to the DashBoard User Manual.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Physical Installation • 27

  If difficulties or problems are experienced when connecting the Ultricore to a network hub, or with assigning IP
addresses, please contact your network administrator.
To establish a physical connection to the network
1. To connect the primary network connection for the Ultricore panel:
a. Connect one free end of the straight through CAT5/5e/6 cable to a free port of the network hub.
b. Connect the other end of the same cable to Ethernet PORT 1 on the Ultricore rear panel.

Primary Network Connection

PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM
ETHERNET COM2

Backup Network Connection

Figure 4.1 Ultricore — Network Connections

2. If required, connect the redundant network connection for the Ultricore panel:
a. Connect one free end of a second straight through CAT5/5e/6 cable to a free port of the network hub.
b. Connect the other end of the same cable to Ethernet PORT 2 on the Ultricore rear panel.

Connecting the Ultricore to Ross NK Series Devices

Ross NK Series devices, such as routers and remote control panels, communicate within the routing system via the
Ross T-BUS protocol. The Ultricore panel includes two T-BUS ports that can be used to cable an NK Series router
or other legacy device that uses the T-BUS protocol.
For More Information on...
• the T-BUS port pinouts, refer to the section “T-Bus Ports” on page 231.
• establishing T-BUS protocol communications between Ultricore and an NK Series router, refer to the section
“Connecting to Ross NK Series Devices” on page 55.
To connect the Ultricore to a NK Series device via T-BUS
1. Connect a T-BUS Interface cable to one of the T-BUS RJ-45 ports on the Ultricore rear panel.

To NK Series Device

PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM
ETHERNET COM2

To NK Series Device
Figure 4.2 Ultricore — Cabling to Legacy NK Series Devices

28 • Physical Installation Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 2. Connect the other end of the same T-BUS Interface cable to either of the RJ-45 ports of the device. Most Ross
NK Series devices are equipped with two RJ-45 ports for looping or daisy chaining configurations.

Connecting the Ultricore to a Serial Device

Each COM port is a DB9 female port on the Ultricore rear panel that accepts RS-232 or RS-422 connection. These
ports can be used to connect a third-party device or automation system that uses a supported serial protocol for
communications.
For More Information on...
• the COM port pinouts, refer to the section “Serial Ports” on page 230.
• the pinouts required by your device, refer to the user documentation that accompanied your device.
• the serial protocols and commands the Ultricore supports, refer to the chapter “External Control” on page 161.
To connect the Ultricore to a serial device
1. Connect a Serial Interface cable to the COM 1 port on the Ultricore rear panel.

To Serial Device

PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM
ETHERNET COM2

Figure 4.3 Ultricore — Serial Cabling to Third-Party Device

2. Connect the other end of the same Serial Interface cable to the applicable serial port on the device.

Connecting to a Power Supply

The Ultricore panel is powered by one +15V DC, 30W PSU, with an optional PSU available to provide redundancy
and load sharing.
For redundancy, each power cord should be connected to a separate power source for protection against failure of
the A/C power circuit. In the event of one power supply failure, the panel load is seamlessly transferred to the other
connected redundant power supply.

Warning Hazardous Voltages — The safe operation of this product requires that a protective
earth connection be provided. This protective earth is provided by the ground conductor in the
equipment’s supply cord. To reduce the risk of electrical shock to operator and service personnel, this
ground connector must be connected to an earthed ground.

Warning — In some countries it may be necessary to supply the correct mains supply cord. Use only
certified cords for the country of use.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Physical Installation • 29

 To connect the power cables to the Ultricore panel
1. Connect the male end of the provided power cable into the socket marked PSU1 on the Ultricore rear panel.

Note: It is recommended that you always connect the Power Supply Unit to the Ultricore
before connecting to Mains Power.

PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM
ETHERNET COM2

Figure 4.4 Ultricore — Primary Power Connection

Notice — The Ultricore automatically powers on when power is applied.

2. Connect the remaining power cable into the PSU2 power supply socket if redundancy is required.
3. Connect the supplied AC power cable into the power modules.
4. Connect the supplied power cable’s three-prong male connector to an AC outlet.

Configuring the Loss of Power Alarm

The ALARM connector on the Ultricore rear panel is used when the panel loses power so that DashBoard cannot
interrogate a non-powered device. Under normal operation, the Center pin (2) is open. An alarm condition connects
this pin to ground. Refer to the section “ALARM Connector” on page 229 for pinout details.

GND PIN 2

Figure 4.5 De-energized or Alarm State Equivalent Circuit

30 • Physical Installation Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Basic Configuration
The Ultricore system controller with the DashBoard client software allows configuration and control of the
Ultricore and other routing system devices, enhancing the capability of any installed Ross products by providing
access to the entire range of functions. Ultricore provides a basic platform operation with SLP discovery and
manual configuration of connection to DashBoard.
This chapter provides instructions on basic set up that includes launching DashBoard, establishing network
connections for the Ultricore panel, and creating your first database. This includes:
• Launching DashBoard
• Using Walkabout to Assign an IP Address to the Ultricore Panel
• Adding the Ultricore to the Tree View in DashBoard
• Accessing the Ultricore Interfaces in DashBoard

Getting Started
Figure 5.1 summarizes the basic steps in configuring the Ultricore system.

Ultricore Network
Setup

Create a Database
for the Routing System

Establish Device
Connection Points in
Ultricore

Define the Matrices

and Levels

Define the Destinations

and Sources

Configure the
Remote Control
Panel(s)

Configure
Resource Management
(if required)

Figure 5.1 Workflow for Configuring the Ultricore

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Basic Configuration • 31

 Launching DashBoard
DashBoard must be run on a computer that has a physical wired Ethernet connection. Wireless connections do not
allow device discovery.
For More Information on...
• downloading and installing the DashBoard client software, refer to the DashBoard User Manual.
• the Ultricore interfaces in DashBoard, refer to the chapter “DashBoard Interface Overview” on page 185.
To launch DashBoard
1. Ensure that you are running DashBoard software version 8.2.0 or higher.
2. Launch DashBoard by double-clicking its icon on your computer desktop.

Using Walkabout to Assign an IP Address to the Ultricore Panel

Once the Ultricore panel is physically installed and cabled to your facility network, you will need to assign it a
static IP Address to enable DashBoard to locate it on your network. Establishing an IP Address enables DashBoard
to communicate with the Ultricore and update the Basic Tree View with the Ultricore nodes.
To assign a static IP address to the Ultricore panel
1. Launch DashBoard.
2. From the DashBoard client main toolbar, select File > Show Walkabout.
The DashBoard window displays the Walkabout table.
3. Click Refresh, located at the bottom of the Walkabout tab, to ensure the list in the Walkabout table is current.
4. In the Walkabout table, find the entry for the Ultricore you want to configure.
5. Use the Name field to assign a unique identifier to the Ultricore panel. This will be the name displayed in the
Tree View of DashBoard.
 After editing a cell in the Walkabout table, press Enter to confirm your edits. To verify your changes, wait up to
30 seconds, then click Refresh.
6. Use the Address field to specify the IP Address supplied by your IT Department for this device.
7. Ensure the Netmask field is set to match your network requirements.
8. Use the Gateway field to specify the IP Address for connection outside of the local area network (LAN).
9. Click Reboot in the row of the Walkabout table for the Ultricore to reboot the device.

Adding the Ultricore to the Tree View in DashBoard

Once you have assigned the Ultricore panel to a static IP Address via Walkabout, you can then manually add it to
the Tree View in DashBoard. Manually adding the Ultricore panel displays its node in the Tree View, granting you
access to the interfaces described in the chapter “DashBoard Interface Overview” on page 185.
To manually add the Ultricore to the Tree View in DashBoard

1. In the Basic Tree View toolbar of DashBoard, click .

The Add New Connections dialog opens.
2. Expand the openGear/DashBoard Connect node.

32 • Basic Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 3. Select TCP/IP DashBoard Connect or openGear Device.
4. Click Next >.
The TCP/IP DashBoard Connect/openGear Device dialog opens.
5. Select the JSON radio button as the Protocol.

6. Enter the IP Address for the Ultricore in the IP Address field assigned in the section “To assign a static IP
address to the Ultricore panel” on page 32.
7. Perform one of the following steps:
• In the text fields provided, enter the display name and port of the Ultricore you wish to add; or
• Click Detect Frame Information to automatically retrieve the connection details.
8. Click Finish.
The Ultricore panel displays in the Tree View.

Accessing the Ultricore Interfaces in DashBoard

The interfaces are accessed by expanding the Ultricore node in the DashBoard Tree View.
To access the Ultricore interfaces in DashBoard
1. Locate the Ultricore node in the Tree View of DashBoard.
2. Expand the Ultricore node.
3. Expand the Ultricore Controller node to display a list of sub-nodes in the Tree View.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Basic Configuration • 33

 Each sub-node is an Ultricore interface.
4. Expand a sub-node to access the functions of the interface.
For example, expand the Database node to list the options available for configuring a database for the
Ultricore.
5. Double-click a node to display its tab in the right-side of the DashBoard window.
For example, double-click the Salvos node to display the Salvos interface (as seen in the example below).
 The selected interface may be blank or missing some data if the database is new and is not configured yet.

Configuring the Ultricore Mode

Ultricore Mode is the control system feature that enables an Ultricore to control up to three client routers over an
Ethernet connection. This functions as a master/slave (remote) system where the master Ultricore is configured as a
Primary and each remote router is configured as a Client.

Overview
When an Ultrix router is a client to the primary Ultricore, it acts similar to an Ross NK router in the system. The
client router provides another set of inputs and outputs with a crosspoint between them. These inputs and outputs
are then available to assign in the database of the primary Ultricore.
The primary Ultricore initiates a connection point to the client device(s) in the routing system. Once
communication is established, whenever a crosspoint switch or salvo is executed on the primary Ultricore, the
commands are automatically pushed to the client device(s).
For More Information on...
• monitoring the communications between the primary Ultricore and its clients, refer to the section “Monitoring
the Ultricore Mode Status” on page 317.

Assigning a Role to the Ultricore

Primary and client operation is determined by the role assigned to the Ultricore in its Communication Settings
interface.
 Ensure each Ultricore is connected to your facility network and configured for Ethernet communications.

34 • Basic Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 To configure the Ultricore as the primary
1. Expand the Devices node.
2. Expand the Controllers + Matrices node.
3. Double-click the node for your Ultricore.
The Hardware Configuration interface opens with the Frame Configuration interface selected.
4. Click Communication Settings.
The Communication Settings interface updates.
5. Select Primary from the Ultricore Mode options.

To configure the Ultricore router as a client

1. Expand the Devices node.
2. Expand the Controllers + Matrices node.
3. Double-click the node for your Ultricore.
The Hardware Configuration interface opens with the Frame Configuration interface selected.
4. Click Communication Settings.
The Communication Settings interface updates.
5. Select Client from the Ultricore Mode options.

Specifying the Time Source

The Ultricore requires an external time source in order to accurately report the time-of-day. The options in the
Frame Configuration interface enable the selection of time/date source via an NTP Server in your facility, or you
can set the device time to match the computer which is running the current DashBoard client.

Using an NTP Server as the Time Source

 Before proceeding, contact your IT Department to learn the IP address(es) of the NTP server(s) in your facility.
To specify an NTP Server as the time source for the Ultricore router
1. Expand the Devices node.
2. Expand the Controllers + Matrices node.
3. Double-click the node for your Ultricore.
The Device Configuration interface opens.
4. Locate the NTP Servers table.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Basic Configuration • 35

 5. If you are using one NTP server, enter the IP address in the Address field of the Server 1 row.
6. If using a backup NTP server:
a. Enter the IP address of the first NTP server in the Address field of the Server 1 row.
b. Enter the IP address of the backup NTP server in the Address field of the Server 2 row.
7. Select the NTP Enabled box.
8. Verify that the Status field(s) in the NTP Servers table report a valid connection to the listed IP address(es).
You may need to refresh the interface as follows:
a. Close the Device Configuration interface.
b. Re-open the Device Configuration interface by repeating steps 1 to 3 to update the Status field(s).

Using the DashBoard Client Computer as the Time Source

This section outlines how to set the Ultricore to the local time without using an NTP Server. Instead, you will set the
time to the values reported by the DashBoard client computer you are using.
 The time the Ultricore reports is not linked to this computer. It is a once off setting of the time to match the
computer time when the Set to PC Time button is selected on the Ultricore interface. If the DashBoard client
computer time changes, you will need to update the time reported on the Ultricore by repeating the procedure
below.
To specify the DashBoard client computer as the time source for the Ultricore
1. Expand the Devices node.
2. Expand the Controllers + Matrices node.
3. Double-click the node for your Ultricore.
The Device Configuration interface opens.
4. Locate the NTP Servers table.
5. Click Set to PC Time. This button is located above the NTP Servers table.

Reviewing the Network Settings for the Ultricore Panel

Once you establish initial communications with the Ultricore panel, and it displays in the DashBoard Tree View,
you may wish to alter the network settings according to your facility network requirements.
To update the network settings for the Ultricore panel
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Network tab.

36 • Basic Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 3. Locate the Settings area of the tab.
4. Use the Address field to specify the new static IP Address for the Ultricore panel.
5. Use the Subnet Mask field to specify the subnet mask for your network.
6. Use the Gateway field to specify the gateway for communications outside of the local area network (LAN).
7. Click Network Settings Apply.

Re-naming the Ultricore

Each Ultricore can be given a unique name that is used on internal menus and as the identifier in the tree views of
DashBoard.
 Changing the Ultricore name after database configuration takes time to propagate through the system, and for
DashBoard to reconnect, resuming stable system operation. Sufficient time must be allowed when making this
change before attempting to use the system. This time will vary depending on features, matrix size, and
configuration. In the case of a system with an ULTRIX-1RU and ULTRIX-2RU, the worst case will be 3-4
minutes. In the case of a system with an ULTRIX-5RU, the worst case is 10 minutes. The Ultricore name is
typically assigned during initial commission and very rarely ever changed again.
To re-name the Ultricore in DashBoard
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Use the Device Name field to specify the new name for the Ultricore.
4. Press Enter to apply the new name.

Configuring Access for DashBoard Clients

You can specify which DashBoard clients on your network can access and connect to your Ultricore. By default, the
Permitted Clients list is blank, allowing all DashBoard clients on your network to connect to your Ultricore.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Basic Configuration • 37

 To enable access for a DashBoard client
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Network tab.
3. Locate the Permitted Clients area of the Network tab.
4. Click Add in the Permitted Clients area of the Network tab.
The Add Address dialog opens.
5. Use the IP Address field to specify the IP Address of the DashBoard client you wish to grant access to your
Ultricore.
6. Click Apply.
The Add Address dialog closes.
The Dashboards list in the Permitted Clients area updates to display the specified IP Address.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 for each DashBoard client you want to allow access.
 Ensure that the IP Address for your DashBoard client machine is also added.
8. Click Apply in the Permitted Clients area to apply the change.
To disable access for a DashBoard client
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Network tab.
3. From the Dashboards list, select the IP Address for the DashBoard client you want to disable access for.
 Do not delete the IP Address for your DashBoard client machine.
4. Click Delete in the Permitted Clients area of the Network tab.
5. Click Apply in the Permitted Clients area to apply the change.

38 • Basic Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Software License Keys
The Ultricore has software options that license functions and features. This chapter outlines the available software
licensed features, and how to install a software key for a licensed feature on your Ultricore.

Before You Begin

When installing a software license key on the Ultricore:
• You must have the DashBoard client installed and communicating with the Ultricore that you wish to install the
key for.
• Ensure that you are using DashBoard version 8.2.0 or higher. This information is available by selecting Help >
About DashBoard from the DashBoard main toolbar.

License Keys Overview

Table 6.1 provides a brief summary on the types of licensed features available for the Ultricore

Table 6.1 List of Ultricore Licensed Features

License Description
Ultricore-EMBER+ A license that enables the use of the EMBER+ protocol for video and
audio streaming via an ULTRIX-IP-IO blade.
Ultricore-NVISION A license that enables the use of the NVISION protocol on the Ultricore.
ULTRICORE-PRO A licensed that provides full Ultricore Profiles support.
Ultricore-SNMP A license that enables basic SNMP monitoring on Ultricore.

Installing a License Key

Ross Video uses license keys to control user access to specific Ultricore features. You can obtain a key for an
Ultricore licensed feature from Ross Video Technical Support.
To install an Ultricore license key
1. Launch the DashBoard client.
2. Locate the Ultricore node in the Tree View.
3. Expand the Ultricore node to display a list of sub-nodes in the Tree View.
4. Expand the Devices node.
5. Expand the Controllers + Matrices node.
6. Double-click the node for your Ultricore.
The Device Configuration interface opens.
7. Click Licenses.
8. Make a note of the character string in the Request Code field for the feature you wish to enable.
9. Contact Ross Video Technical Support using the information found in the section “Contacting Technical
Support” on page 16.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Software License Keys • 39

 a. When you speak to your Technical Support representative, tell them your name, your facility name, and the
Request Code from the Licenses table.
b. You will be given a License Key that must be entered in the applicable field in the Licenses table.
10. Enter the provided License Key in the applicable License Key field in the Licenses table.
 You can also right-click on the row for the License Key you are installing, and copy the Request Code to or paste
the License Key from the Microsoft® Windows® clipboard.
11. Click Apply in the row for the License Key you entered in step 10.
12. Verify that the Count field is updated to report each installed License Key.

Removing a License Key

 Removing a License Key also removes user access to all of the Ultricore features associated with that License
Key.
To remove a Ultricore license key
1. Launch the DashBoard client.
2. Locate the Ultricore node in the Tree View.
3. Expand the Ultricore node to display a list of sub-nodes in the Tree View.
4. Expand the Devices node.
5. Expand the Controllers + Matrices node.
6. Double-click the node for your Ultricore.
The Device Configuration interface opens.
7. Click Licenses.
Each row represents a type of licensed feature.
8. Click in the cell for the slot and licensed feature you want to remove.
A drop-down menu displays.
9. Select Disable to remove the license.

40 • Software License Keys Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Ultricore Profiles
A DashBoard client has the ability to detect devices on a subnet and can enable complete control of all settings on
all devices. Ultricore Profiles are designed to enable administrators to assign and manage user permissions and
determine the level of access for those users. For example, one user is only responsible for monitoring the video
sources is given access only to control panels, while another user who manages the input and outputs of the routing
matrix is also given access to manage the databases.
This chapter provides an introduction to the Ultricore Profiles for your routing matrix and includes general
information on managing those profiles.

Overview
The Ultricore Profiles operate as a form of hierarchical database where user permissions are organized into a
tree-like format. A profile determines which groups and pages that a user can access.
Any number of profiles may be created and can be used in the following ways:
• Group/Role — This profile type is not specific to any user or machine. Once created they can be referenced or
used by any number of users or machines. For example, a Graphics Editor profile can be created and referenced
by a team of graphics editors. When a new control panel is added to that profile, all graphics editors are updated
with the new panel automatically.
• User — A user profile identifies a specific username and can either reference an existing role as above or copy
an existing role then modify, add, or remove items to allow total customization as required. This allows a user
that has a specific profile to have the same capabilities on any DashBoard system regardless of where they log in.
• Location — This profile is defined by a specific location (user station) and assigns a consistent function
regardless of who is logged in that suits the operation in that location. In this way the DashBoard instance in front
of, for example, the audio operator in a specific control room will only have the optimize functionality for that
role. A location profile can also reference or copy and modify role profiles.
Profiles can also be created that identify a specific user at a specific user station to further optimize the user
interface in different locations. If no profile exists for the combination of user and location, the system default
profile is used.
When there are multiple possible profiles the one used is chosen as follows:
1. A User profile has the highest priority. This means that an administrator can log in anywhere and execute
Administrator level functions or an operator can login anywhere and have an optimized UI for their function.
2. A Location profile is used for all users at a specific location unless the user logged in has a profile. This allows
more or different functionality for users logged into a specific location even if they do not have a specific
profile themselves.
3. The system default profile is used in all other scenarios.

Modes of Operation
The Ultricore Profiles feature consists of three sub-functions or modes of operation.
 The ULTRICORE-PRO license is required to upgrade from the basic, non-configurable profiles on the Ultricore
chassis to full, customizable configurations. The ULTRICORE-PRO license is standard on the Ultricore-BCS.

Creation and Management of User Credentials

User profiles can reference the operating system username of the individual currently logged into the workstation.
Enabling User Credentials in the Setup tab of the status page engages the Ultricore User Credentials feature which
allows an independent definition of usernames and passwords specifically for the Ultricore Profiles feature.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Ultricore Profiles • 41

 Creation and Management of User Profiles via the Default Role Profiles Only
User and Location profiles are created and function as above but only reference one of the three default profiles:
• Engineer Admin (default profile) can access all features;
• Operator Admin (default operator profile) has full database and configuration capability but not engineering
configuration and admin functions; or
• Operator (default minimum profile) can access all soft panels for normal day to day operations.

Full Creation, Customization and Management of User Profiles

In addition to the above mode included with Ultricore-BCS and optional for Ultrix and Ultricore-CC is the ability to
create and customize group and role profiles as well as create custom profiles on a user or location basis as
appropriate. In addition, the order of items within these profiles can be set to fully optimize the operational
environment for a specific user or group as needed.

Ultricore Profiles Interface

The options for configuring and managing the Ultricore Profiles are organized as individual panes within a single
interface of a DashBoard window. The available options, and the number of panes, depends on whether the
ULTRICORE-PRO license is installed.

Accessing the Ultricore Profiles Interface

You display the Ultricore Profiles interface by selecting its node in the DashBoard Tree View for the Ultricore in
your system. By default, all nodes are displayed and accessible by any user or DashBoard client machine.
To display the Ultricore Profiles interface
1. Launch DashBoard on your desktop.
2. Locate the Ultricore in the Tree View of DashBoard.
3. Expand the Ultricore node to display a list of sub-nodes in the Tree View.
4. Expand the Database sub-node.
5. Double-click the Ultricore Profiles sub-node.
The Ultricore Profiles interface displays in the DashBoard window. The following example shows the default
interface (the ULTRICORE-PRO license is not enabled).

42 • Ultricore Profiles Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Overview
When the ULTRICORE-PRO license is enabled, the Ultricore Profiles interface is organized into five distinct areas.
Figure 7.1 Each area is briefly described in this section starting with the leftmost area of the DashBoard window.

Figure 7.1 Example of the Ultricore Profiles Interface with the ULTRICORE-PRO license

Users
When the system is configured to use the user login mechanism, a list of all currently configured usernames along
with their current online status displays in this area.

Profiles
A list of all currently configured profiles. Selecting a profile (row) in this area automatically updates the items
displayed in the Profile Details, Device Tree, and Options areas.

Profile Details
This area displays the details of the profile showing the conditions under which the tree in the following section will
be applied.

Tree Nodes
A visual representation of the tree view that is defined in the Profile Details. Note that certain entries that are
specific to licenses or other conditions may be visible but not in the actual tree view. Should conditions change that
enable those entries, they will appear as shown in this display. A profile also maintains the position of items in
groups allowing the most relevant items to be the easiest to reach.
The tree nodes are organized in a hierarchy where the top level (blue icons) list system specific options, and
secondary levels (yellow icons) list specific functions.
 This area only displays when the ULTRICORE-PRO license is enabled.

Group Tabs
This area displays all the available items that have not yet been assigned to the currently selected profile but are
available to define.
 This area only displays when the ULTRICORE-PRO license is enabled.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Ultricore Profiles • 43

 Creating a Database of Users
If you wish to use the User Profile feature, the first step is to create a new user account. Once this account is created,
all users will default to the Operator Profile (the default minimum profile) unless or until they have a profile
created that allows them appropriate access for their role.
 When creating users and profiles, ensure that the system is not in use. Any currently active DashBoard instances
will require users to login and features may be blocked.
You can create as many users as required by your system.
To create a new user account
1. Display the Ultricore Profiles interface as outlined in “To display the Ultricore Profiles interface” on
page 42.
2. Click Manage Users.
The Manage Users dialog opens.
 Users can change their own password at the login screen, the Update Password button allows an Administrator
to reset a forgotten password. A user name change requires the deletion of the current user and the creation of a
new one with the new user name.

3. Click Add.
4. Use the User Name field to assign a unique identifier for the user account.
5. Use the Password field to define the password the user will need to enter when logging in with this account.
6. Repeat this procedure for every new user you wish to create.
Once all the user accounts are created, you can proceed to create profiles and assign users to these profiles.

Creating a Profile
 The User Profiles features offers a significant flexibility to optimize the tools in front of individual operators
which, if inadvertently mis-configured could lead to administrators being locked out. As such, it is a good idea
for the administrator to ensure that no users are actively working within the system prior to making significant
changes to users and profile settings.

44 • Ultricore Profiles Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Four profiles are created automatically:
• Engineer Admin Profile — a group profile giving access to all features and functions as has been available prior
to the Ultricore Profiles feature. This profile is read-only by default.
• Operator Admin Profile — a group profile giving access to all non-engineering features and functions. This
allows an operational Administrator the ability to configure and use all operational functions and databases of the
systems.
• Operator Profile — a group profile giving access to only the soft control panels. This allows users that are
registered but either have no defined profile on a system or only require basic operational access the ability to
control pre-configured operational functions of the systems.
• Ultricore Admin Profile — a user profile which allows the “Administrator” user mentioned above to have full
admin and engineering capabilities by using the Default Profile. This profile is read-only by default.
 All users default to the Default Tree Profile with no System Login required. In other words, until specifically
enabled, the Ultricore Profiles feature is not engaged, and the systems will all behave as in previous versions. It
should be noted that while the Ultricore Profiles feature is not engaged, the default user profile can be modified
should the tree for all users need to be modified.
To create a profile
1. In the Profiles area, click Manage Profiles.
The Manage Profiles dialog opens.

2. Click Add to create the new profile.

3. Use the Profile Name field to assign a unique name for the profile.
Since the profile could be either specific to a user, a workstation or a group of users, it is recommended to
create a name that reflects its purpose. For example, John Doe (a specific user), Graphics Operator (a group of
users), or PCR1-TD (a workstation).
4. Use the Username field to assign a specific user to the profile.
An asterisk (*) indicates the profile applies to all users subject to the other profile detail entries.
5. Use the Machine Name field to specify the OS/DNS machine name for a workstation.
This allows the identification of a specific workstation in an environment where DHCP means the IP address
may change over time.
6. Use the IP Address field to specify the IP address for a workstation.
This allows identification of a specific workstation in a statically addressed system.
7. Use the Admin box to enable/disable (selected/cleared) access to admin functions.
For example, upload, reboot, refresh and other tasks that are not normal operational functional requirements.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Ultricore Profiles • 45

 8. Use the Parent Profile to assign any of the currently configured profiles as a parent or reference profile for the
profile being created or edited.
9. Use the Use and/or Copy options to determine if the parent profile tree configuration is used directly by the
profile being created or edited or copied into this profile allowing customization of the tree for the specific
needs of the user.
 If another profile tree is used rather than copied, changes to the tree need to be performed on the parent profile
tree and will affect all users that “use” that parent profile and that the same change would need to be executed
individually on all users that copied the parent profile tree.
10. Repeat this procedure for every new profile you wish to create.

Defining the Permissions for a Profile

Once a profile is created, the remaining two areas of the Ultricore Profiles interface allow display and/or
modification of the tree structure that will be enabled for the user or users of the selected profile.
 This section only applies if the ULTRICORE-PRO license is enabled.

Figure 7.2 Example of the Tree Nodes and Tabs for a Selected Profile

Overview
This section provides a brief overview of each area and their options.

Tree Nodes
The tree (the leftmost area) displays all the assigned options and their desired order in the tree structure much like
the tree view in DashBoard for an Ultricore. The nodes in Ultricore Profiles tree view are determined by your
system configuration and any licenses installed for your system. Buttons at the bottom of this area (Up, Down,
Remove) allow entries to be moved up and down in the tree within the group to which the item belongs or removed
if they are not required for the selected profile. When removed, the item is returned to the list of available items in
the appropriate group tab.

Group Tabs
The group tabs (the rightmost area) contain all items available in the group in question that are not included in the
selected profile’s tree currently. If an item is not in the tree currently but required, the appropriate group tab is
selected, the item required is selected and the Assign button is clicked moving it to the bottom of the appropriate

46 • Ultricore Profiles Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 group of the tree. The Up and Down buttons can then be used to order the tree items specific to the needs of the
profile.
When any changes are made to the tree structure(s), the changes are captured locally but are not recorded in the
database until the Apply button on the bottom row is clicked. Clicking Apply records all the pending changes in the
system database. Clicking Cancel will discard any unsaved changes. There are no pending changes if the Apply and
Cancel buttons are not highlighted.

Enabling the Ultricore Profiles Feature

Once you created the profiles and groups for your system, you can proceed to enable the Ultricore Profiles feature.
Enabling the feature requires you to disable the current user credentials and settings and apply the profiles and
groups you defined in previous sections.
 Before proceeding, ensure that you created a new Administrator profile that has full access to your system. This
is a separate profile from the default Ultrix Admin profile (which is read-only).
 This procedure requires a reboot of the Ultricore.
To enable the Ultricore Profiles feature
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Locate the Ultricore Profile Settings area.
You may need to scroll down the tab to view this area.
4. Clear the User Credentials box.
A dialog opens to confirm the selection.
5. Select the User Profiles box.
A dialog opens to confirm the selection.
6. Click Reboot.

Application of the Ultricore Profiles

Once the Ultricore Profiles function is enabled, all users from that point forward will initially receive a tree that
only has a System Login entry. Once the user is created with either the default or a specific password by the
Administrator, the user can login through a login page displayed in the DashBoard window.

Figure 7.3 Example of the System Login Sub-node

To log in
1. In the Basic Tree View, locate the device you wish to access.
2. Expand the device nodes to display the System Login sub-node.
3. Double-click the System Login sub-node.
The System Login page displays in the DashBoard window.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Ultricore Profiles • 47

 4. Enter the credentials for the profile assigned to you.
5. Click Login.
• The login information is confirmed by the system, and the appropriate tree with all assigned pages and
functions are immediately available for use in the DashBoard window.
• The Login page updates to the Logout page.
 When you log out, the Basic Tree View returns to the System Login tree view. Figure 7.3
To change the password
• Click Change Pwd on the System Login page.
 The old password is required for the user to change the password and the new password needs to be confirmed to
ensure the new password is as the user expects. If the old password is forgotten or lost the admin can force an
update to the user password through the Manage Users dialog in the Users area of the Ultricore Profiles interface.

User Data Import/Export

Due to the need to maintain different permutations of user data to system data, the Import/Export database functions
now includes the ability to import databases with and without the user data (user accounts and profiles). In addition,
the user files can be imported and exported independently to any chosen database. This allows for instance a
different show configuration to be loaded while maintaining the same staff and location configuration or for a truck
for instance, allows a new crew configuration to be loaded without changing system configurations.

48 • Ultricore Profiles Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Configuring the Ports
This chapter provides instructions on how to configure the ports available on the Ultricore rear panel.

Updating the Network Settings for the Ultricore

Once you establish initial communications with the Ultricore, and it displays in the DashBoard Tree View, you may
wish to review or change the IP Address and other settings according to your facility network requirements.
 This section is not applicable if your Ultricore is already set to the correct IP Address.
To update the network settings for the Ultricore
1. Locate the Ultricore in the Tree View of DashBoard.
2. Expand the Ultricore node to display a list of sub-nodes in the Tree View.
3. Expand the Devices node.
4. Expand the Controllers + Matrices node.
5. Double-click the Ultricore node for your Ultricore.
The Device Configuration interface opens.
6. Click Communication Settings.
7. Locate the Ethernet Configuration area.
The Ethernet Configuration area reports the status of the active ENET port on the Ultricore rear panel, and
the network settings for the Ultricore.

8. Use the IP Address field to specify the new static IP Address for the Ultricore.
9. Use the Subnet Mask field to specify the subnet mask for your network.
10. Use the Default Gateway field to specify the gateway for communications outside of the local area network
(LAN).
11. Click Apply to apply the new settings.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Configuring the Ports • 49

50 • Configuring the Ports Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Device Communication Setup
Ultricore functions as a central controller for the Ross routing system. From Ultricore, you can store and implement
routing system configurations into a system while providing an overview of your entire routing system.

Ultricore Communications Overview

A connection point is how the Ultricore is connected to routing system components such as routers (matrices), and
remote control panels. A connection point defines the interface and the protocol to be used for communications.
Once defined, Ultricore retrieves the information of any device on that connection point.
 Third-party device information is not automatically retrieved. These devices must be added manually.
Ultricore provides bi-directional protocol translation to facilitate the control of third party or legacy routers as part
of a Ross routing system. You can also integrate control over a Ross routing system by a third-party automation
system. Table 9.1 lists the important communication ports for Ultricore.

Table 9.1 Communications Ports

Device Protocol Port
NK Routers TCP 5000
Ultrix Routers TCP 15000
Walkabout Discovery UDP 5555

Device Discovery in DashBoard

When DashBoard is launched, devices such as openGear frames and Ross NK routers, are listed and made available
in the Tree View. DashBoard uses the open SLP protocol to locate devices on the same network as the computer
running the DashBoard client software. There are two methods for adding a device to the Tree View in DashBoard:
using the auto-connect feature of DashBoard or manually adding a device by specifying the IP address of the
device. Both methods are described in more detail in the DashBoard User Manual.

Communications between Ultricore and the Devices in a Routing System

The Ultricore Connections interface enables you to use DashBoard to locate devices in your network. To enable
Ultricore to function as the ‘master’ of the routing system, you must establish communications with the devices it is
connected to and define how they are connected. Each router must have a connection point defined. For those
devices that are not directly connected to your network, such as Ross NK Series routers, you must supply their
connection information (NK-NET/NK-IPS) in the Connections interface. Once this information is entered into the
interface, the Ultricore panel can communicate directly with the device.

Connecting to an Ultrix Router

Ultricore may act as a master controller for one or more Ultrix routers as well and legacy Ross NK series devices. A
connection is made from the controlling (primary) Ultricore panel to the (client) Ultrix router(s). The controlling
Ultricore panel contains the full database configuration for the entire operation of the system.
 Ultricore redundancy is only available when using Ultricore BCS panels. Refer to the Ultricore BCS User Guide
for more information.
For More Information on...
• configuring the Ultrix router, refer to the Ultrix User Guide.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Device Communication Setup • 51

 General Work Flow

Define a Create a Map

Configure Map
Install the Configure Connection Database Logical
the Logical
Required the Point in Destinations
Ultriscape Sources to
Licenses Ultrimix on from Ultricore to
on Ultrix
for Ultrix the Ultrix Ultricore for the Ultrix
the Ultrix Inputs
to Ultrix Ultrix I/O Outputs

Figure 9.1 Work Flow for Setting up a Connection Point between Ultrix and Ultricore

Configuring the Ultriscape

The Ultriscape PiP and head destination mapping is required in the Ultricore 'master' database for each Ultriscape
head in use by the Ultrix router. The procedure is the same as the Ultriscape configuration for a stand-alone Ultrix
router.

Mapping Logical Sources and Destinations

The physical inputs and outputs the Ultrix provides will display in the Port Labels tab of the Ultricore database.
These input and outputs ports are now ready for re-naming (if required) and mapping to logical source and
destinations.

Setup Notes
Keep the following mind when establishing a connection point from an Ultricore to an Ultrix router:
• Ensure unique device names for each Ultrix router. This allows identification of each individual router
throughout the setup process. You can edit the name via the Ultrix front panel interface as outlined in the Ultrix
User Guide.
• Ensure that the Remote Controller Mode is enabled for each client Ultrix router. Refer to the Ultrix User Guide
for details.
• Client hardware configuration (licensing, port configuration, etc.) is achieved via its own device node within the
DashBoard tree.
• Client Ultriscape Multiviewers are configured via the Ultriscape node within the DashBoard tree of the client
Ultrix that physically hosts that Multi-Viewer.
• Routing commands are issued to the primary device via remote control panels, external protocols or DashBoard
soft panels1. Any client router will ignore routing commands not originating from the primary while in this
connected mode.

Adding a Connection Point

Before defining a connection point between the Ultricore and an Ultrix router, you must verify that the router is
listed in the Walkabout utility.
Once a connection point is established between the Ultricore and its client routers, the physical inputs and outputs
the clients provide will display in the Port Labels tab of the primary Ultricore database. These input and outputs
ports are now ready for renaming (if required) and mapping to logical source and destinations.
To add an Ultrix connection point
1. Ensure each router is installed, configured, and listed in the Basic Tree View of your DashBoard client.
2. Launch the Walkabout utility in DashBoard as follows:

1. Only the soft panels defined within the database of the Ultricore may control the system.

52 • Device Communication Setup Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 a. Expand the NK Utilities node in the Tree View.
b. Double-click Show Walkabout to open the Walkabout utility in the DashBoard window.
c. Verify that the Ultrix router is listed in the table of the Walkabout utility. Make a note of its name and IP
Address.
3. Display the Connections tab in DashBoard for Ultricore as follows:
a. Expand the Database node in the Tree View.
b. Double-click the Connections node.
The Connections tab opens that lists the current database connection points.
4. Click Edit > Add.
The Add Connections dialog opens.
5. In the Add Connections dialog, perform the following:
a. Use the Protocol menu to select ultrix.
b. Use the Type menu to select tcp.
c. Use the Count menu to specify the number of new connection entries (rows) to make in the Connections
table. For example, to connect to three Ultrix routers you would enter a value of 3.

d. Click Apply to create the new device row(s) in the Servers table.
The Add Connection dialog closes.
6. In the Name column of the Servers table, click the cell of the new Ultrix row to display the drop-down menu.
7. From the drop-down menu, select the Ultrix router you which to establish a connection to.
8. If the Ultrix router is not listed in the drop-down menu:
a. Close the Connections tab.
b. Launch Walkabout to detect the on-line devices in your system.
c. Double-click the Connections node for the Ultricore to display its Connections tab.
d. Repeat steps 4 to 7.
9. In the Enabled column of the new row, select Enable.
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 for each additional Ultrix router.
11. Click Apply at the bottom of the Connections tab to save the new settings.

Deleting a Connection Point

 Once a connection point is deleted from the Ultricore database, the Ultricore panel and the Ultrix router will need
to be re-configured as per the new requirements. This will require you to update the database(s) on each device.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Device Communication Setup • 53

 To delete a connection point between Ultricore and an Ultrix router
1. Display the Connections tab for Ultricore as follows:
a. Expand the Database node in the Tree View.
b. Double-click the Connections node.
The Connections tab opens that lists the current database connection points.
2. In the Servers table, select the Ultrix connection to be deleted.
The row is now highlighted in the Servers table.
3. Click Edit > Delete.
4. Power cycle the Ultrix router to re-establish its own internal database.
5. Re-configure Ultricore and the Ultrix router as per the new requirements.

Connecting to Ross Ethernet Devices

A router must be defined for Ultricore to utilize it. A router or remote control panel may be defined using the
auto-populated fields in the Connections tab in the Ultricore interface, or, in the case of third-party devices, with
connection settings added manually to the fields.
For More Information on...
• establishing communications with a third-party device, refer to the section “Connecting to Third-Party
Devices” on page 57.
To establish communication between Ultricore and a Ross ethernet device
1. Launch the Walkabout utility in DashBoard as follows:
a. Expand the NK Utilities node in the Tree View.
b. Double-click Show Walkabout to open the Walkabout utility in the DashBoard window.
c. Verify that your Ross Ethernet device is listed in the table of the Walkabout utility. Make a note of its name
and IP Address.
 If the device you want to connect to the Ultricore is not detectable in Walkabout, you can still establish
communications with it in Ultricore using the Connections > Settings menu to manually enter/edit the device
settings.
2. Display the Connections tab for Ultricore as follows:
a. Expand the Database node in the Tree View.
b. Double-click the Connections node.
The Connections tab opens that lists the current database connection points.

54 • Device Communication Setup Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 3. Click Edit > Add.
The Add Connections dialog opens.
4. In the Add Connections dialog, perform the following:
a. Use the Protocol menu to specify the ethernet protocol the device uses to communicate with the Ultricore.
b. Use the Type menu to select tcp.
c. Use the Count menu to specify the number of new connection entries to make in the Servers table.
d. Click Apply to create the new device row(s) in the Servers table.
5. In the Name column, click the cell of the new row to display the drop-down menu.
6. From the drop-down menu, select the device you which to establish a connection to.
 Ross Video devices detected by Walkabout will auto-populate this menu. Third-party devices will require a
chosen name to be typed into this field.
7. In the Enabled column of the new row, select Enable.
8. Click the [...] button to verify the IP Address and TCP port values for the device.
9. Click Apply at the bottom of the Connections tab to save the new settings.

Connecting to Ross NK Series Devices

Ross NK routers and remote control panels are linked via the T-Bus Control System, a multi-drop RJ-45 control
system. These T-Bus devices can communicate over Ethernet via a Ross NK-IPS or NK-NET.
A connection point between the Ultricore and an NK-IPS or NK-NET is defined using the auto-populated fields in
the Connections tab of the Ultricore interface. Once a connection point is established, the Ultricore gains control
over those Ross NK devices connected to the NK-IPS or NK-NET.
To establish a connection point between Ultricore and an NK-IPS or NK-NET
1. Launch the Walkabout utility in DashBoard as follows:
a. Expand the NK Utilities node in the Tree View.
b. Double-click Show Walkabout to open the Walkabout utility in the DashBoard window.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Device Communication Setup • 55

 c. Verify that your the NK-NET and/or NK-IPS device is listed in the table of the Walkabout utility. Make a
note of its name and IP Address.
 If the device you want to connect to the Ultricore is not detectable in Walkabout, you can still establish
communications with it in Ultricore using the Connections > Settings menu to manually enter/edit the device
settings.
2. Display the Connections tab for Ultricore as follows:
a. Expand the Database node in the Tree View.
b. Double-click the Connections node.
The Connections tab opens that lists the current database connection points.
3. Click Edit > Add.
The Add Connections dialog opens.
4. In the Add Connections dialog, perform the following:
a. Use the Protocol menu to select Ross NK.
b. Use the Type menu to select tcp.
c. Use the Count menu to specify the number of new connection entries to make in the Servers table.
d. Click Apply to create the new device row(s) in the Servers table and close the Add Connections dialog.
5. In the Name column, click the cell of the new row to display the drop-down menu.
6. From the drop-down menu, select the device you which to establish a connection to.
 Ross Video devices will auto-populate this menu.
7. In the Enabled column of the new row, select Enable.
8. Click the [...] button to verify the IP Address for the device.
9. Click Apply at the bottom of the Connections tab to save your settings.

Connecting to Ross NK Series Devices via T-Bus

The Ultricore hardware contains a loop-though T-BUS port for direct communication with Ross NK Series devices.
A connection point for this T-BUS port is defined by default in Ultricore.
To establish a connection between Ultricore and a Ross NK Series Device via T-Bus
1. Physically connect the Ross NK series to the T-BUS port on the Ultricore rear panel as outlined in the section
“To connect the Ultricore to a NK Series device via T-BUS” on page 28.
2. Follow the instructions in the section“Integrating Ross NK Series Devices with Ultricore” on page 148.
Ultricore will load the information from the Ross NK series devices for further database configuration.

Connecting to Ross Remote Control Panels

An Ultricore can communicate with external remote control panels such as the Ross RCP-NK series, RCP-ME, and
RCP-QE. Communication with Ethernet enabled panels is direct from the panel to Ultricore. Refer to the panel user
manual for specific configuration details.

RCP-NK Series Panels

Communication with RCP-NK series panels is via an established connection point with either an NK-IPS or
NK-NET network bridge. Refer to the RCP-NK User Guide for details.

56 • Device Communication Setup Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

  RCP-NK series control panels do not automatically receive the active database labels. The database labels must
be replicated on the each RCP-NK series device.

RCP-ME and RCP-QE Panels

The connection from the remote control panel to Ultricore is configured on the panel’s DashBoard interface.
1. Display the RCP Connection Editor in DashBoard for your remote control panel. Refer to the user guide for
your remote control panel for details.
2. Locate the Servers to Connect table.
3. In the first row of the table, use the IP address column to specify the IP address of the Ultricore that the remote
control panel will communicate with.
4. Send the current configuration file to the remote control panel. Refer to the user guide for your remote control
panel for details.
The remote control panel will connect to the Ultricore router and receive a copy of the current database labels.

Connecting to Third-Party Devices

Ultricore provides bi-directional Ethernet and Serial protocol support with labels to facilitate control of:
• third party and legacy routers as part of the Ultricore routing system
• an Ultricore routing system by third party control or automation system
 Before proceeding, ensure that your third-party device is installed and configure according to its documentation.

Overview
Ultricore provides bi-directional translation of the following third-party protocols:
• GVG Native serial and Ethernet protocols
• Probel SW-P-08 serial protocol
Connection to third-party devices may be categorized into two broad groups: controller and controllee.
• Controllers are devices that will control the Ultricore and connect via what may be termed an incoming
connection.
• Controllees are devices to be controlled by Ultricore router and connect via what may be termed an outgoing
connection.
For More Information on...
• the protocols and ports for configuring third-party communications on Ultricore, refer to Table 9.2 and
Table 9.3.
• the commands that Ultricore supports, refer to the chapter “External Control” on page 161.
• connecting a third-party device to the serial port on the Ultricore rear panel, refer to the section “Connecting the
Ultricore to a Serial Device” on page 29.

Incoming Ethernet Connections

The Ultricore can communicate with third-party external devices via a TCP connection. By default, Ultricore runs a
server process for the following Ethernet protocols:

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Device Communication Setup • 57

 Table 9.2 Supported Protocols — Ethernet Connection
Protocol Default Port
GVG Native Series 7000 TCP: 12345
Probel SW-P-08 TCP: 8910
RossTalk TCP: 7788
TSL UMD v3.1 TCP: 5727
UPD: 4490
TSL UMD v4.0 TCP:5728
UDP: 4491
TSL UMD v5.0 TCP: 5729
UDP: 4492

These Ethernet servers are always running. No further configuration is required — simply configure your client
device to match the Ultricore’s TCP/IP address and port number.

Outgoing Ethernet Connections

This section outlines how to configure a client connection (out-going control) interface to the external system.
To set up a connection over Ethernet between Ultricore and a third-party device
1. Expand the Database node.
2. Double-click the Connections node located under the Database node.
The Connections tab opens that lists the current database connection points.
3. Click Edit > Add.
The Add Connections dialog opens.
4. In the Add Connections dialog, perform the following:
a. Use the Protocol menu to select the Ethernet protocol the device uses to communicate with the Ultricore.
Refer to Table 9.2 for a list of options.
b. Use the Type menu to select tcp or udp as required by the external device.
c. Use the Count menu to specify the number of new connection entries to make in the Servers table.
d. Click Apply to create the new device row(s) in the Servers table.
5. In the Name field, type a unique identifier for the third-party device. This name is used to identify the specific
device within the Ultricore database.
6. Click the [...] button in the new row to display the Communication dialog.

58 • Device Communication Setup Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 7. Use the Communication dialog to further define the server to connect to:
a. Use the Address field to specify the IP Address assigned to the third-party device.
b. Use the Port field to specify the Port Number assigned to the third-party device that the Ultricore will try to
connect to.
c. Use the Wrapping field to specify the TSL UMD v5.0 TCP wrapping is enabled or disabled. This setting is
ignored for other protocol types.
d. Click Apply to save your settings and close the dialog.
8. Edit the Description field to your requirements.
9. In the Enabled column of the new row, select Enable.
The Connected field in the Connections tab reports “Connect” when communication is established between
the third-party device and Ultricore.
10. Click Apply in the Connections tab to save the new settings.

Defining a Serial Connection

Ultricore may communicate directly with third-party devices using a native serial protocol. The same protocols may
also be implemented via serial connections with the following settings:
 A serial connection point must be implemented on the Connections tab in the Ultricore database before
communications can start. The settings may be changed from the protocol defaults to suit your requirements.

Table 9.3 Supported Protocols — Serial Connections

Settings
Protocol Type Baud Data Bits Parity Stop Bits
GVG Native Series 7000 RS232 or RS422 38400 8 None 1
Probel SW-P-08 RS232 or RS422 38400 8 None 1
TSL UMD v3.1 RS422 or RS485 38400 8 Even 1
TSL UMD v4.0 RS422 or RS485 38400 8 Even 1
TSL UMD v5.0 RS422 or RS485 38400 8 Even 1

To set up a serial connection between Ultricore and a third-party device

1. Double-click the Connections node located under the Database node.
The Connections tab opens.
2. Click Edit > Add.
The Add Connections dialog opens.
3. In the Add Connections dialog, perform the following:
a. Use the Protocol menu to select the protocol standard.
b. Use the Type menu to select Serial.
c. Use the Count menu to specify the number of new connection entries to make in the Servers table.
d. Click Apply to create the new device row(s) in the Servers table.
4. In the Name field, type a unique identifier for the third-party device. This name is used to identify the device
within the Ultricore system.
5. Click the [...] button in the new row to display the Communication dialog.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Device Communication Setup • 59

 6. Use the Port field to specify the Port Number assigned to the third-party device that Ultricore will try to
connect to.
7. From the Type menu in the Communication dialog, select RS232 or RS422.
The table in the Communication dialog updates to display the settings for serial communication.
8. Use the Type field to specify the serial transmission standard for the third-party device.
9. Use the Baud Rate field to specify the bit rate for the third-party device.
10. Use the Parity field to specify the parity for the third-party device.
11. Click Apply to save your settings and close the Communication dialog.
12. In the new row, select the Enabled box.
13. Click Apply to save your settings.
The Connected field in the Connections tab reports “Connect” when communication is configured and
enabled between the third-party device and Ultricore. The system does not poll or query the serial link to verify
the validity of the setup.

Creating a Logical Matrix for an External Device

If the external device presents a matrix of crosspoint switches for routing, you can create logical matrices in an
Ultricore database using the device inputs and outputs. Creating a logical matrix from the external device enables
Ultricore to include the inputs and outputs for selection in the Sources and Destination tabs of the Ultricore
database.
 The input/output range and level you specify in the Ultricore database must match the settings within the external
matrix.
To create a logical matrix from an external device
1. Expand the Database node.
2. Double-click the Third Party Matrices node located under the Database node.
The Third Party Matrices tab opens.
3. Click Edit > Insert to add a blank row to the Third Party Matrices table.

60 • Device Communication Setup Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 4. In the Name field, type a unique identifier for the third-party matrix. This name is used to identify the matrix
within the Ultricore database.
5. From the Device ID drop-down menu, select the device you want to define the logical matrix for. This is the
name given to the device when you established a connection point with it on the Connections tab.
 The Device ID menu lists only the third-party devices that have a valid connection point with the Ultricore
router.
6. Define the matrix size as follows:
a. Use the First Output and Last Output fields to define the range of destinations from the device within the
Ultricore database.
b. Use the First Input and Last Input fields to define the range of sources from the device within the
Ultricore database.
 These created inputs and outputs will use the nomenclature DeviceID.Slot.Port.Type.Channel where DeviceID
represents the Name assigned to the external device on the Connections tab.
7. Use the Level field to specify the number of levels for the device within the Ultricore database.
8. Use the Type field to specify the signal type for the matrix.
9. Click Apply to save the new matrix to the database and add it to the list of available matrices in the Port
Labels tab.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Device Communication Setup • 61

62 • Device Communication Setup Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Database Configuration
A database in Ultricore stores and implements a routing system configuration. Multiple databases can be configured
using a different combination of devices, matrices, levels, sources, and destinations for the routings system.
Procedures in this chapter assume that you have DashBoard launched and the Ultricore displayed in the Tree View.

How a Database Determines the Routing System

The various tables within an Ultricore router determine if a signal/route can be made from input to output.
For a given level, if there is a physical port mapped in both the Source and Destination tabs, and the controlling
device has the level enabled, then a crosspoint switch can be issued and executed on the router(s). Table 10.1
outlines a database with four levels. Level 1 has mapped valid Sources and Destinations, and the level is enabled on
the controlling device.

Table 10.1 Example of a Multi-Level Database Setup

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Is a physical source assigned?  Xa  
Is a physical destination assigned?   Xb X

Is the Level enabled on the Controller device?    X

Can a switch be executed? c Xd Xd Xd

a. An entry is not present in the corresponding Level column of the Source tab.
b. An entry is not present in the corresponding Level column of the Destinations tab.
c. A resulting switch will be executed.
d. A resulting switch will not be executed. Physical ports from the same logical matrix must be
entered in the same control level before a connection can be made.

Configuration Overview
The generalized work flow of configuring a database for the Ultricore is:
1. Establish connection points to external devices. Refer to the chapter “Device Communication Setup” on
page 51 for details.
2. Verify available I/O ports to ensure correct system connections. This default port naming convention of
frame.slot.port.type nomenclature is to be overwritten (if required) at this stage.
3. Create a database as outlined in the procedure “Creating a New Database” on page 64.
 Ultricore does not support Unicode characters.
4. Define a soft panel or establish a connection to a remote control panel (RCP).

Database File Management Overview

Each database consists of a collection of configuration files necessary for Ultricore operation. The database resides
within the Ultricore storage system. Multiple databases may be saved and accessed at any time.
Use the System Status > Database tab to create, load, and delete databases. Use the System Status > Transfer tab
to backup and restore databases.
For More Information on...
• the System Status tabs and menus, refer to the section “System Status Interfaces” on page 186.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Database Configuration • 63

 Database management consists of the following tasks:

Creating a New Database

A database manages the configuration file and settings for your Ultricore. Ultricore may use a number of database
configurations depending on its role in the routing system. Refer to the section “Creating a New Database” below.

Loading an Existing Database

Use the System Status > Database tab to load a configured database to your Ultricore. Refer to the section
“Loading a Database” on page 66.

Exporting a Database
Enables you to capture a database configuration in a *.uda file that is saved to a location on your network that you
can specify. Refer to the section “Exporting a Database” on page 82.

Importing a Database
Enables you to import a saved *.uda file and make it available in the System Status > Database tab. Refer to the
section “Importing a Database” on page 83 for details.

Deleting an Existing Database

You can choose to permanently delete any configured database on your Ultricore. Refer to the section “Deleting a
Database” on page 83 for details.

Creating a New Database

When you define a database, the information you enter into the Levels, Sources, and Destinations fields will
auto-populate the applicable fields in the other interfaces for that Ultricore router. You can change the labels for the
destinations and sources at any time using the options in the Destinations and Sources interfaces. There are two
methods for creating a new database: using the Database Builder, or using the options in the System Status >
Database tab. Both methods are described below.

Using the Database Builder

Use the Database Builder to quickly create a starting point database. Once you define the basic parameters of the
new database using the settings in the Quick Start interface, you can then define the levels, destinations, and sources
for the new database. This makes it very easy to build basic configurations as well as get a system up and running
quickly.
 Before proceeding, ensure that the required license keys are installed for the device(s) the database will be saved
to. Refer to the chapter “Software License Keys” on page 31 for more information.
To create a new database using the Database Builder
1. Display the Database nodes as outlined in the procedure “To access the Database interfaces in DashBoard”
on page 25.
2. Double-click the Database Builder sub-node.
The Database Builder interface opens in the DashBoard window with the Quick Start page automatically
displayed.

64 • Database Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 3. Use the Provide a Name field to type a unique identifier for the database.
4. Select the box(es) from the provided list of detected routers the routers to make the database available to.
5. If you wish to leave the remaining settings at their default values and quickly setup a database, you can click
Finish and the database will be generated based on selected routers in step 4.

 Click Next, located at the bottom of the DashBoard window, to display the next page of options in the Database
Builder interface.
6. If any AUX Ports are populated with SFP modules, use the Include AUX ports menu to specify how to label
the I/O in the database.
 The default is Insert at Slot, which labels the I/O in each slot as 1-18 with the AUX Ports as 17 and 18.
7. Use the Support Video Signal and Number of Audio Channels menus to define the Levels in the database.
8. Use the Breakaway Source Support menus to implement audio shuffling. The options for SDI and MADI
channels are as follows:
• None — there are no audio channels of this type.
• Mono — audio channels are applied to all levels
• Stereo — audio channels are assigned by pair (1-2, 3-4, 5-6 etc.)
• Quad — audio channels are assigned in groups of four (1-4, 5-8, 9-12 etc.)
• Oct — audio channels are assigned in groups of eight (1-8, 9-16, 17-24 etc.)
 You must have SFP modules installed that support MADI.
9. Use the Disconnect Source menu to set unused audio channels to disconnect.
10. Use the Passthrough Source menu to route the sources without changes/edits.
11. If you have an UltriScape license installed, use the last set of menus to define the heads, including the number
of Picture in Picture (PIPs) that new layouts can include.
 You can still create and edit layouts in a database with settings that differ from these.
12. Click Next to review the levels, destinations, and sources tables before completing the database builder.
a. Use the Levels page to review or rename the level labels if required.
b. Use the Destination page to review the destination label to physical port mapping. Renaming the labels is
also possible from this page if required.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Database Configuration • 65

 c. Use the Sources page to review the source label to physical port mapping. Renaming the labels is also
possible from this page if required.
13. Click Finish to create the new database and apply it to the routers selected in step 4.
 Click Rename to define multiple elements. For example, clicking Rename on the Sources page enables you to
define a prefix (e.g. SRC) and apply from a starting point (input 4).

Using the Database Tab

You can use the Database tab in the System Status interface when only configuring a database for a single device.
For More Information on...
• assigning destinations, refer to the section “Defining the Destinations in a Database” on page 69.
• assigning sources, refer to the section “Defining the Sources in a Database” on page 73.
To create a new database
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Database tab.
3. Locate the Add Database options in the Database Management area of the tab.

4. In the Add Database Name field type a unique identifier for the database. When the database is currently
loaded in the system (in use), the Database node displays the database name in the tree view under the Ultricore
node.
5. Select the Include I/O Maps box to create a database to match the quantity of BNC I/O ports available in the
connected router.
 Each SDI IN/OUT ports will be mapped to the default labels of SRC# and DST# respectively for Level 1 only
(SDI). The Destinations and Sources fields are ignored, but the Level field is applied.
6. Use the Levels field to specify the total number of levels available in the database.
7. Use the Sources field to specify the total number of inputs available in the database.
8. Use the Destination field to specify the total number of outputs in the database.
9. Click Database Add to create the new database and save it to the Ultricore file system.
10. Load the database to ensure it is active before proceeding to customize it.

Loading a Database
Each active database includes a unique setup saved to the Ultricore file system. You must recall a database before
you can configure the matrices, levels, sources and destinations, and soft panels for a particular setup. This also
enables you to quickly recall a saved (configured) routing setup just by recalling a different database.

66 • Database Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 To load a saved database
1. In the Tree View, double-click the System Status node.
2. Select the Database tab.

3. From the Name menu in the Load Database area, select the database you want to load.
4. Click Load.
5. Verify the following to ensure the database was loaded:
• The Name, Levels, Sources, and Destination read-only fields in the Current Database area in the
Database tab report the correct values.
• The Database node in the Tree View for the Ultricore now reports the correct Database name.

Defining the Levels in a Database

A level is a term used to describe a section or layer of the routing system (e.g. video level, audio level). Ultricore
uses level definitions for easy identification and control of various routing matrices or parts of the system. The
levels defined in the Levels tab have a direct relationship with the Level columns found in other database tabs.

Before You Begin

Determining the amount of levels needed requires a little planning.
Ultricore may operate with as little as a single level to define control of the Ultrix SDI switching matrix. Ultricore
also allows independent routing of SDI embedded audio channels as well as MADI channels. Using one single level
of control will limit the independent selection of embedded audio and/or MADI streams.
Any Ross NK series routers or other third-party routers attached to the Ultricore system will require their own
control level/s.
 The quantity of levels determines how many independent input/output ports (including embedded / MADI
channels) may be grouped together as one source or destination selection.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Database Configuration • 67

 Examples
A single control level can be used when there is limited independent embedded audio/MADI channel switching.
ID Name
1 SDI

 If AFV (audio-follow-video) is desired on a single level database, the Audio Bypass must be enabled for each
input and output port or disable the Ultrimix function.
A single level setup with NK-A64 analog audio router attached would require the following levels:
ID Name
1 SDI
2 AnAud L
3 An Aud R

A setup using SDI with 4 embedded audio levels. This can allow independent switching of 4 of the embedded SDI
channels and grouping of 4 MADI channels.The following levels would be required:
ID Name
1 SDI
2 A1
3 A2
4 A3
5 A4

To define a level in the database

1. Double-click the Levels node located under the Database node.
The Levels tab opens.
2. Verify the ID field to specify the priority of the level.
 The ID field is a row number automatically defined by the routing system. This ID value corresponds to level
numbers when used in Remote Control Panel (RCP) configurations and third-party communications.
3. To re-name a level:
a. In the Name column, type a unique identifier for the level. It is recommended to use words that describe the
level such as 3G, Audio, etc.
b. Click Enter to update the name.
4. To select a unique color that will represent the level in the soft panels:
a. In the Color column, click the cell for the level you want to configure to display the Color Select dialog.
b. Select the hue from the provided vertical color grid in the Color Select dialog.
c. Use the Saturation options to specify the depth of the color.
d. Use the Lightness options to specify the amount of white or black mixed with the selected hue.
e. Confirm that the field beneath the color grid displays the correct color for the level.
f. Apply your changes using one of the following options:
• Click Live to preview the color scheme and apply it but not close the Color Select dialog; or

68 • Database Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 • Click OK to apply the new color to the level and close the Color Select dialog.
5. To provide additional information about the level:
a. In the Description column, type a brief summary of the level or provide additional information about the
level use or purpose. This column is for identification purposes only and not required for operation.
b. Click Enter to update the description.
 Inserting a level in a working database can have destructive effects. It is recommended to insert below the last
row to minimize this effect.
6. Click Apply to save your changes.
To create additional levels
1. Select a row in the Levels tab.
2. Click Edit.
 You can also copy and paste an existing level by clicking Copy > Paste from the Edit dialog.
3. To add a single level, select Add.
4. To add multiple levels:
a. Select Add Series to display the Add Rows dialog.
b. In the Prefix field, type the phrase. For example, if you want to create levels as AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2, etc.,
you would type AUDIO into the Prefix field.
c. In the Start Value field, type the first number to be used in the series.
d. In the End Value field, type the last number to be used in the series.
e. Click Apply.
To delete an entry from the Levels table
1. Select the row for the destination to delete in the Levels tab.
2. Click Edit > Delete.
 Ensure the ID numbers are correctly sequenced when deleting and inserting entries in the Levels table by
selecting Edit > Reset All IDs.

Defining the Destinations in a Database

Ultricore uses a database to assign inputs and outputs, as well as define levels and matrices. Table 10.2 outlines the
available outputs for mapping to the destinations in your database.

Table 10.2 Mapping Outputs to Database Destinations

Physical
or Virtual
Default Slot Label Port? Description
Slotx.out[y].sdi.ch1 P Digital video output slot x port y
flex.out[y].sdi.ch1 P Digital video output flex slot port y (ULTRIX-FR5 only)
Slotx.out[y].audio.chn P Digital audio channel n of output slot x port y
flex.out[y].audio.chn P Digital audio channel n of flex slot output port y (ULTRIX-FR5 only)

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Database Configuration • 69

 Table 10.2 Mapping Outputs to Database Destinations
Physical
or Virtual
Default Slot Label Port? Description
Slotx.head[y].sdi.ch1 V Ultriscape video output slot x head y
Slotx.heady-pip[z].sdi.ch1 V Video destination for PiP z of slot x Ultriscape Head y
Slotx.heady-pip[z].meter.chn V Audio destination for meter n PiP z of slot x Ultriscape Head y
Slot0.mixer-in[y].audio.ch1 V Audio destination mixer input port y
Slot0.virt-out[y].sdi.ch1 V Acuity AUX BUS output port y

For More Information on...

• defining a database, refer to “Creating a New Database” on page 64.

Specifying a Destination Label

The Destinations tab allows the definition of names (or labels) for your routing system outputs. When a database is
initialized, default labels of Dest # are automatically filled in to the quantity specified by the database. These
destination labels may be changed to suit your naming conventions.
To specify a label for a destinations
1. Double-click the Destinations node located under the Database node.
The Destinations tab opens.

2. Select the cell in the Name column of the label to alter.

3. Type the required label.
4. Press Enter to apply the change.
 Take care to limit the amount of characters as these labels are displayed on Remote Control Panels (RCPs) which
have a limited display area.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each destination you want to specify a virtual label for.
6. Click Apply at the bottom of the Destinations tab to save your changes.

70 • Database Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Mapping an Output to a Destination
The Destinations tab is organized into a table with each row representing a Destination and each column
representing a Level. The table cells are the output ports assigned to the Destination for that level. Initially, the table
cells are empty (e.g. the destination labels are not assigned to physical output sockets). These may be populated as
described in “To map a physical output to a destination” on page 71, or, via the Advanced Fill tool.
The Advanced Fill tool is provided to create new destination labels that are automatically assigned to physical
outputs depending on options set by the user. The audio routing features provided by Ultricore can result in an
extensive source and destination definition map requiring some time to manually enter. The Advanced Fill tool will
speed the assignment of physical ports greatly.
Various editing options are available from the editing menus, accessed via the Edit button located on the bottom
toolbar of the tab.
 If you are defining the destinations in a database for use with UltriScape, it is recommended to first define the
destinations using the Advanced Fill tool, then re-name the UltriScape Heads as required. Otherwise there may
be duplicate assignments of channels in the database.
For More Information on...
• assigning Tally IDs to destinations, refer to “Assigning the Tally IDs to the Destinations” on page 88.
To map a physical output to a destination
1. Double-click the Destinations node located under the Database node.
2. If desired, type a new name for the destination in the Name cell as outlined in the procedure “To specify a
label for a destinations” on page 70.
3. In the Destinations tab, locate the column for the level you wish to include in the destination definition.
4. To map a single output, perform one of the following:
• Select the cell of the row in the table to display a list of available outputs; or
• Choose an output from the available Matrix Outputs list and click Assign.
 Cell ranges may be horizontal as well as vertical. For example, a common operation would be to assign SDI
embedded channels 1 to 16 to levels 2 to 17. The selected range would be horizontal across many levels but the
selection would be vertical from the available outputs. The assignment operation will take the top most of the
available outputs selection and assign it to the left most of the horizontal selection and so on through the
selection range.
5. To map a range of outputs:
a. Select the first cell in the table column.
b. Press and hold Shift.
c. Select the last cell in the table column.
d. Select a range in the available Matrix Outputs list with the same click + shift-click method.
e. Click Assign.
6. Click Apply at the bottom of the Destinations tab to apply the changes to the database.
To map a series of outputs to the same level
1. In the table of the Destinations tab, select the first row in the series you want to define for the level.
2. Press and hold Shift.
3. Click the last row in the series to select a range of cells within a Level column.
4. Select a range of outputs as outlined in “To map a physical output to a destination” on page 71.
5. Click Assign.
6. Click Apply at the bottom of the Destinations tab to apply the changes to the database.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Database Configuration • 71

 To delete an entry from the Destinations table
1. Select the row for the destination to delete in the Destinations tab.
2. Click Edit > Delete.
 Ensure the ID numbers are correctly sequenced when deleting and inserting entries in the Destinations table. To
re-order the Destinations ID numbers in the database, click Edit > Reset All IDs in the Destinations tab.

Configuring the Destination Follow Feature

The Destination Follow feature enables you to route a specific destination’s source signal to another destination.
For example, set Dest 1 to follow Dest 6 so when Dest 6 is switched to a different source, Dest 1 is also
switched to that same source. You can set multiple destinations to follow another single destination, or each
following their own unique destination.
To configure the Destination Follow feature
1. Double-click the Destination Follow node located under the Database node.
The Destination Follow tab opens.

2. Locate the row for the destination to configure.

3. Use the Following menu to specify the output that the selected Destination will follow.
In the example below, the user is configuring Dest1 to follow Dest6.

72 • Database Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Defining the Sources in a Database
Ultricore uses a database to assign inputs, as well as define levels and matrices. Table 10.2 outlines the available
inputs for mapping to the sources in your database.

Table 10.3 Mapping Inputs to Database Sources

Physical
or Virtual
Default Slot Label Port? Description
Slotx.in[y].sdi.ch1 P Digital video input slot x port y
flex.in[y].sdi.ch1 P Digital video output flex slot port y (ULTRIX-FR5 only)
Slotx.in[y].audio.chn P Digital audio channel n of input slot x port y
flex.in[y].audio.chn P Digital audio channel n of flex slot input port y (ULTRIX-FR5 only)
Slot0.disconnect[1].sdi.ch1 V A ‘no signal/disconnected’ video source
Slot0.disconnect[1].audio.ch1 V A ‘no signal/disconnected’ audio source
Slot0.passthrough[1].audio.ch1 V Audio on this channel will follow video regardless of audio matrix
Slot0.layout:name[n].mv.ch1 V Ultriscape Head layout file name id n – route a layout to a head to
change Ultriscape layouts
Slot0.mixer-out[y].audio.ch1 V Audio source for mixer output port y
Slot0.mixerd-out[y].audio.ch1 V Audio source for mixer channel strip direct output port y
Slot0.virt-in[y].sdi.ch1 V Acuity AUX BUS Input port y

For More Information on...

• assigning Tally IDs to sources, refer to the section “Assigning the Tally IDs to the Sources” on page 88.

Specifying a Label for a Source

The Sources tab allows the definition of labels for your routing system inputs. When a database is initialized,
default labels of Src # are automatically filled in to the quantity specified by the database. These source labels may
be changed to suit your naming conventions.
To specify a label for a source
1. Double-click the Sources node located under the Database node.
The Sources tab opens.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Database Configuration • 73

 2. Select the cell in the Name column of the label to alter.
3. Type the required label.
4. Press Enter to apply the change.
 Take care to limit the amount of characters as these labels are displayed on Remote Control Panels (RCPs) which
have a limited display area.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each destination you want to specify a virtual label for.
6. Click Apply at the bottom of the Destinations tab to save your changes.
7. Click Apply at the bottom of the Sources tab to save your changes.

Mapping an Input to a Source

The Sources tab allows the mapping of physical and virtual input ports to your routing system inputs. The tab is
organized into a table with each row representing a Source and each column representing a Level. At the top of the
column is the name of the Level. The table cells are the input ports assigned to the source for that level.
An Advanced Fill tool is provided to create new source labels that are automatically assigned to inputs depending
on options set by the user. The audio routing features provided by Ultricore can result in an extensive source and
destination definition map requiring some time to manually enter. The Advanced Fill tool will speed the
assignment of ports greatly.
Various editing options are available from the editing menus, accessed via the Edit button located on the bottom
toolbar of the tab.
To map a physical input with a source
1. Double-click the Sources node located under the Database node.
2. If desired, type a new name for the source in the Name cell as outlined in the procedure “To specify a label for
a source” on page 73.
3. In the table of the Sources tab, locate the column for the level you wish to include in the source definition.
4. To map a single input, perform one of the following:
• Select the cell of the row in the table to display a list of available input sockets; or
• Choose an input from the available Matrix Inputs list and click Assign.

74 • Database Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

  Cell ranges may be horizontal as well as vertical. For example, a common operation would be to assign SDI
embedded channels 1 to 16 to levels 2 to 17. The selected range would be horizontal across many levels but the
selection would be vertical from the available inputs. The assignment operation will take the top most of the
available inputs selection and assign it to the left most of the horizontal selection an so on through the selection
range.
5. To map a range of inputs:
a. Select the first cell in the table column.
b. Press Shift.
c. Select the last cell in the table column.
d. Select a range in the available Matrix Inputs list.
e. Click Assign.
6. Click Apply at the bottom of the Sources tab to apply the changes to the database.
To map a series of inputs to the same level
1. In the table of the Sources tab, select the first row in the series you want to define for the level.
2. Press and hold Shift.
3. Click the last row in the series to select a range of cells within a Level column.
4. Select a range of inputs as outlined in step 5 of the procedure “To map a physical input with a source” on
page 74.
5. Click Assign.
6. Click Apply at the bottom of the Sources tab to apply the changes to the database.
To delete an entry from the Sources table
1. Select the row for the destination to delete in the Sources tab.
2. Click Edit > Delete.
 Ensure the ID numbers are correctly sequenced when deleting and inserting entries in the Sources table. To
re-order the Sources ID numbers in the database, click Edit > Reset All IDs in the Sources tab.

Using the Advanced Fill Tool

The Advanced Fill operation is typically a tool used to initially set up an Ultricore database. Edits and
customization may then be performed after the Advanced Fill tool has done the bulk of the work.
The following examples are shown on a new database with only database default settings loaded.
 Take care when determining label names. While a long name may be nice and descriptive for the Source and
Destination tabs, many control devices have limited screen space and labels may be truncated.
For More Information on...
• the settings and menus available in the Advanced Fill tool, refer to the section “Advanced Fill Tool” on
page 371.

Create Source Labels with Assignments for SDI Video Levels

The objective of this example is to insert new labels and assignments for inputs for all routers on SDI Levels only.
To create source labels with assignments for SDI video levels
1. Define the levels as outlined in the section “Defining the Levels in a Database” on page 67.
2. Select an entry point in the Sources tab from where the new labels and assignments will begin.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Database Configuration • 75

 a. Double-click the Sources node located under the Database node.
The Sources tab opens.
b. Select the cell of the row for the entry point. The new entries will be inserted below this row.
c. Click Edit > Fill.
The Breakaway Fill dialog opens.

3. If required, select Fill > Entire Device.

4. In the Name field, type a label prefix. Enter a trailing space to ensure a space between the prefix and the
numerical counter.
5. From the AUX Port menu, define the router AUX ports.
6. From the Slot menu, select the first slot in the router. (e.g. Ultrix.slot1)
7. From the Port menu, select the first IN port. (e.g. Ultrix.slot1.in[1])
8. From the Starting Channel menu, select the first channel of the selected port. (e.g. Ultrix.slot1.in[1].sdi.ch1)
9. In the Levels table of the dialog, select the fully qualified Input assignment name from the I/O Assignment
column.
10. Click Apply.
The dialog closes, and the Source tab updates with the newly created and insert labels with assignments.
 The Ultrix AUX ports are defined in the list. In this case, these would only be usable providing an SFP module
that includes an SDI video input was installed into the relevant AUX port on the Ultrix rear panel.

76 • Database Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Create Destination Labels with Assignments for SDI Video Levels
The objective of this example is to insert new labels and assignments for Ultricore outputs for the SDI only level.
To create destination labels with assignments for SDI video levels
1. Define the levels as outlined in the section “Defining the Levels in a Database” on page 67.
2. Select an entry point in the Destinations tab from where the new labels and assignments will begin.
a. Double-click the Destinations node located under the Database node.
The Destinations tab opens.
b. Select the cell of the row for the entry point. The new entries will be inserted below this row.
c. Click Edit > Fill.
The Fill dialog opens.

3. If required, select Fill > Entire Device.

4. In the Name field, type a label prefix. Enter a trailing space to ensure a space between the prefix and the
numerical counter.
5. From the AUX Port menu, define the router AUX ports.
6. From the Slot menu, select the first slot in the router. (e.g. Ultrix.slot1)

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Database Configuration • 77

 7. From the Port menu, select the first OUT port. (e.g. Ultrix.slot1.out[1])
8. From the Starting Channel menu, select the first channel of the selected port. (e.g. Ultrix.slot1.out[1].sdi.ch1)
9. In the Levels table of the dialog, select the fully qualified Output assignment name from the I/O Assignment
column.
10. Click Apply.
The dialog closes, and the Source tab updates with the newly created and insert labels with assignments.
 The AUX ports of the Ultrix router are defined in the list. These would only be usable providing an SFP module
that includes an SDI video output was installed into the relevant AUX port on the router rear panel.

Create Source Labels with Assignments for SDI and Embedded Audio
The objective of this example is to create source labels and assignments for the SDI video and the first four
embedded audio channels for an entire Ultricore enabled slot. The remaining twelve audio channels are not used.
To create source labels with assignments for the SDI video and embedded audio levels
1. Ensure that you have the Ultrimix licensed feature enabled for the slot. Refer to the Ultrix User Guide for
details.
2. Define one level for SDI Video and 16 levels for the embedded audio as outlined in the Ultrix User Guide.
3. Select an entry point in the Sources tab from where the new labels and assignments will begin.
a. Double-click the Sources node located under the Database node.
The Sources tab opens.
b. Select the cell of the row for the entry point. The new entries will be inserted below this row.
c. Click Edit > Fill.
The Breakaway Fill dialog opens.

4. If required, select Fill > Entire Slot.

78 • Database Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 5. In the Name field, type a label prefix. Enter a trailing space to ensure a space between the prefix and the
numerical counter.
6. From the AUX Port menu, define the router AUX ports.
7. From the Slot menu, select the Ultrimix enabled slot in the router. (e.g. Ultrix.slot1)
8. From the Port menu, select the first port of the Ultrimix enabled slot. (e.g. Ultrix.slot1.out[1])
9. From the Starting Channel menu, select the first channel in the series.
10. In the Levels table of the dialog, select a range of Level rows by clicking the first row level name, then holding
the Shift button, click the last row level name.
 Ensure to select the SDI Video level and the first four embedded audio levels.
11. Click Assign to automatically fill the I/O Assignment column for the selected levels.
The Breakaway Fill dialog updates but does not close.

To set the unused audio channels to disconnect

1. From the Slot menu in the Breakaway Fill dialog, select Ultrix.slot0.
2. From the Port menu, select Ultrix.slot0.
3. From the Starting Channel menu, select Ultrix.slot0.disconnect[1].audio.ch1.
4. In the Levels table of the dialog, select the remaining twelve audio levels (e.g. A5-A16) from the I/O
Assignment column.
5. Select Ultrix.slot0.disconnect[1].audio.ch1 from the I/O Assignment cell for the first selected row (e.g. A5).

The disconnect[1].audio will be applied to all the selected rows1.

1. Pass through may also be selected. Pass through has the effect of passing through any audio (silence or otherwise) on the channels A5
to A16. Disconnect effectively mutes those channels on the output stream.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Database Configuration • 79

 6. Click Apply.
The dialog closes, and the Source tab updates with the newly created and insert labels with assignments.

Creating Labels with Assignments for SDI and Embedded Audio, with Audio
Breakaways
The objective of this example is to create and insert a series of labels with assignments for SDI video and embedded
audio. Also, audio breakaway sources will be required to implement audio shuffling.
To enable the ability to shuffle audio (that is to take an audio channel and route into another stream in a different
position within that stream), we need to define that audio channel as a source and assign it across all required levels.
For example, we may wish to take channel 3 audio from an input SDI stream, and route (just that individual
channel) to channel 2 of an output SDI stream. To facilitate this, the following definitions are needed;

Table 10.4 Example 1

SDI Level Level A1 Level A2 Level A3 Level A4
Source Name
SDI 1 ch3 <blank> In[1].audio.ch3 In[1].audio.ch3 In[1].audio.ch3 In[1].audio.ch3
Destination Name
SDI out1 Out[1].sdi.ch1 Out[1].audio.ch1 Out[1].audio.ch2 Out[1].audio.ch3 Out[1].audio.ch4

 If only four audio levels are defined as shown in Table 10.4, and assuming no other level definitions, the user can
only route 'SDI 1 ch3' to any of the corresponding levels in the destination, i.e. cannot route 'SDI 1 ch3' to a
destination stream channel 8 as Out[1].audio.ch8 is not defined in any of the destination levels.
To enact the previous example, the user selects the destination channel by selecting the appropriate level button on
the control panel (in this case, the A2 level) before actuating the crosspoint switch (destination button SDIout1,
then, source button SDI 1 ch1). The Advanced Fill tool can automate the creation of these audio breakaway sources
saving a great deal of setup time.
To create source labels with assignments for SDI and embedded audio, with audio breakaways
1. Define one level for SDI Video and 16 levels for the embedded audio as outlined in the section “Defining the
Levels in a Database” on page 67.
2. Select an entry point in the Sources tab from where the new labels and assignments will begin.
a. Double-click the Sources node located under the Database node.
The Sources tab opens.
b. Select the cell of the row for the entry point. The new entries will be inserted below this row.
c. Click Edit > Fill.
The Breakaway Fill dialog opens.

80 • Database Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 3. From the Fill menu, select Entire Slot.
4. In the Name field, type a label prefix. Enter a trailing space to ensure a space between the prefix and the
numerical counter.
5. From the Slot menu, select the Ultrimix enabled slot in the Ultrix router. (e.g. Ultrix.slot1)
6. From the AUX Port menu, define the router AUX ports.
7. From the Port menu, select the first port of the Ultrimix enabled slot. (e.g. Ultrix.slot1.out[1])
8. From the Starting Channel menu, select the first channel in the series.
9. In the Levels table of the dialog, assign physical ports to the levels.
10. Select the BRK I/O box for the Levels assignment to be broken out to a separate label/assignment definition.
11. Select the BRK Level box for each level to be included in that label/assignment definition.
12. Click Apply.
The dialog closes, and the Source tab updates with the newly created and insert labels with assignments, and
the audio breakaways definitions.

 Notice the chx automatic suffix to the label. This may be overridden by placing text in the BRK Suffix cell of the
Breakaway Fill dialog.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Database Configuration • 81

 Creating Categories
You can assign each destination, source, and level to a specific category in the router database. Defining multiple
categories enable you to filter the sources, destinations, and level and organize them into logical groups. Each
database provides up to six categories that you can define.
For More Information on...
• managing the categories for your Ultricore database, refer to the chapter “Using Categories” on page 91.

Managing your Databases

A database can be archived by saving it as a *.uda file to a specified location. This enables you to import and export
an archived database which is useful for:
• creating a safe, off-frame copy of a default database configuration
• importing a copy of a reference database that can be tailored to a specific application
• restoring a known backup copy of a database to an Ultricore
 This feature requires DashBoard v8.2 or higher.

Overview
The following information is captured when you archive a database:
• Definitions of levels, sources, and destinations
• Salvos
• Category assignments
• Soft panels
• User assigned port labels
• Current crosspoint status
 The following information is not captured: hardware specifics, and license settings.

Exporting a Database
You create an archive of a database (as a *.uda file) using the options in the System Status > Transfer tab.
To export a database to the archive
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Transfer tab.
3. Locate the Export area on the tab.
4. Use the Database field to specify the database to export.
5. Click Browse... to specify the location to save the *.uda file to.
The Archive read-only field updates with the selected path and database name.
6. Click Apply.
The Downloading Archive dialog opens to report the status of the export.

82 • Database Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Importing a Database
Once a database is imported from the archive to your system, you can select it from the list of databases to load in
the System Status > Database tab.
 The database is not automatically loaded.You must follow the procedure “Loading a Database” on page 66 to
load the imported database.
To import a database to an Ultricore
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Transfer tab.
3. Locate the Import area on the tab.
4. Select the *.uda file you wish to import as follows:
a. Click Browse...
The Open dialog opens.
b. Use the Open dialog to specify the *.uda file to import.
c. Click Open to close the dialog and load the file.
5. Click Apply.
The Uploading Archive dialog opens to report the status of the transfer.
6. Verify that the imported database is now available for selection in the System Status > Database tab.

Deleting a Database
 Ensure the database that you are about to delete is not currently loaded and in use by Ultricore.
To delete a database
1. In the Tree View, double-click the System Status node.
The System interface displays in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Database tab.
3. From the Delete Database Name menu, select the database you want to delete.
4. Click Database Delete.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Database Configuration • 83

84 • Database Configuration Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Tallies
Ultricore accepts TSL UMD tally messages, and passes tally messages associated with a router source to the routed
destination tally status.

Tally Types
Tally information may be associated with either routing system sources or destinations. Below is a summary of the
implementations.
 Ultricore does not support Unicode characters.

Source Association
Tally IDs associated with routing system sources may serve two purposes:
1. Trigger any Ultriscape Multiviewers to display tally status (this requires that the Ultrix router has at least one
Ultriscape Head enabled and configured).
2. Enable the tally status to be mapped to other Tally IDs based on router crosspoint status (the destination must
have Tally ID associated and Tally Direct enabled).
To associate Tally IDs to sources in the database
• Use the Sources tab in the Database interface to associate the Tally IDs with logical sources in the Ultricore
database.
• Choose the UMD “Tally Level”.

Destination Association
A Tally ID may be associated with routing system destinations. This enables any tally status associated with router
sources to map to a different Tally ID associated with a router destination, based on current router crosspoint status.
• Use the Destinations tab in the Database interface to associate Tally IDs with logical destinations.
• When a source is switched to a destination on the selected Tally Level, Ultricore forwards the tally status of the
source that is active on the destination, but the outbound TSL message has its display ID re-mapped to the
display ID that is associated with the destination (Tally Redirect is set to ON).
 Ensure the destination Tally IDs do not conflict with Tally IDs asserted by other devices.
• When the TallyID is associated with an Ultriscape PiP (slotn.headx-pip[y] or slot0.pip[y]), any assertion on this
TallyID will directly control the PiP tally visual elements and over ride any Tally associated with the PiP video
source (Tally Redirect is set to OFF).
• For switcher support, the label of the connected source to a destination is sent as TSL tally text (TSL v3.1 only
and when Tally Redirect is set to OFF).

Tally ID Format
Table 11.1 summarizes the format that the TSL protocol defines Display IDs that are associated with the tally
displays.

Table 11.1 TSL Protocol — Tally ID Format

TSL Protocol Version Tally ID Format Range
3.1 <displayID> 0 - 127
4.0 <displayID> 0 - 127
5.0 <screenID>:<displayID> 0 - 65535 : 0 - 65535

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Tallies • 85

 Keep the following in mind when using tally display IDs:
• TSL v3.1 and 4.0 protocol messages will always map to screen 0.
• When using TSL v5.0, the screen ID is assumed to be 0 if no screen ID is entered.
• If the controller is configured for either v3.1 or 4.0 protocol, it is not necessary to enter a screen ID.
• If the controller is configured for v5.0, it is only necessary to specify the screen ID if the tally controller is
configured to send messages to tally displays on ‘screens’ other than the one with the screen ID of 0.

Router Tally Output Operation

Ultricore will track current Tally Status messages sent by a controller via Tally Display IDs associated with router
sources. When a source (with a Tally ID) is routed to a destination (with a Tally ID), the router will emit Tally Status
messages that reflect the current tally status of the Tally ID associated with the source, but that target the Display ID
associated with the destination.
 An outgoing connection point must be defined for Ultricore to send the new status out.

Example
Consider the following source and destination configurations:

Table 11.2 Example of Sources and Destinations Assigned to Tally IDs

Name Tally ID Tally Status
Sources
Src 1 5 T1:on
Src 2 10 T1:off
Destinations
Dest 1 33 T1:xxx

For the above configuration settings, the following states are possible:

Table 11.3 Example of Sources and Destinations Assigned to Tally IDs

Router Status Tally Status
Src 1 > Dest 1 TallyID 33 = TallyID 5 (on)
Src 2 > Dest 1 TallyID 33 = TallyID 10 (off)

Tally Routed Mode

The Tally Routed mode associates a tally with a specific router destination. Ultricore knows which input is routed
to that output, and so can assert tally indicators wherever the input signal is displayed in an Ultriscape PiP. Refer to
the Ultrix User Guide for details on this mode.

Router Status over TSL UMD v3.1 Operation

Ultricore can use the TSL UMD protocol version 3.1 to send the connected source database name as tally text. This
requires you to:
1. Set up an outgoing TSL v3.1 connection.
2. Assign Tally ID numbers to the destinations you wish to track.
3. Ensure the Tally mode is set to None.

86 • Tallies Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 When a configured destination changes, the name of the new source will be sent as tally text. Ultrix will resend all
the configured destinations every 1 minute, and immediately for any source change on a configured destination

Getting Started
You must first perform the following in the active database:
1. If RS-232 or RS-422 communication is required, add a serial connection point for either incoming or outgoing
TSL protocol support.
2. Add an Ethernet connection point for outgoing TSL protocol support if not using the serial connection point
described in step 1.
3. Enable Tally ID support.
4. Assign the Tally IDs to the sources.
5. Assign the Tally IDs to the destinations.
6. Set the Tally mode to None.

Adding a Serial Connection Point

Connections may be created via the Edit > Add menu on the Connections tab in the database interface. Refer to the
section “Defining a Serial Connection” on page 59 for details on adding a serial connection point to third-party
devices.

Adding an Ethernet Connection Point

An Ethernet connection point must be added for outgoing TSL protocol support. Incoming Ethernet services are
natively available. Refer to the section “Incoming Ethernet Connections” on page 57 for details on adding an
Ethernet connection point to third-party devices.

Enabling Tally ID Support

To enable tally ID configuration in an active database, you must select the Enable Tally box on the System Status
> Database tab, and then define the Status Level for tally operation.

Enabling Tally ID Support in the Active Database

Once support is enabled, the Source and Destinations tabs display a Tally column which is used to assign Tally IDs
to sources and/or destinations in the active database.
To enable tally ID support in the active database
1. In the Tree View, double-click the System Status node.
The System interface displays in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Database tab.
3. Verify that the active database is the one you wish to enable tally ID support for.
4. Select the Enable Tally box located in the Current Database area.
The Source and Destinations tabs automatically update to display the Tally column.

Defining the Status Level for Tally Operation

The Status Level specifies which level in the routing system is used to determine the current source switched to a
given logical destination.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Tallies • 87

 Generally this should be the main SDI Video level; which in most systems is the level to which the Ultriscape Head
PiP and/or Router Video destinations are mapped in the system database.
To define the status level for tally operation
1. Double-click the Levels node located under the Database node.
The Levels tab opens.
2. Use the Tally Status Level menu (located at the bottom of the Levels tab) to specify the Level in the active
database that will determine the tally status.

Assigning the Tally IDs to the Sources

Assigning a Tally ID to an Ultricore source enables configured Ultriscape displays to show tally information.

TallyID 41 is associated with Src 1 in the Ultricore

database. (TSL UMD v3.1 and v4.0)

Tally Screen 5, ID 41 is associated with Src 1 in the

Ultricore database. (TSL UMD v5.0)

Figure 11.1 Example of Sources with Assigned Tally IDs

 Before proceeding, ensure you verify which TSL protocol you are using. The protocol determines how you must
enter the information into the Tally cells of the Sources tab. Refer to Table 11.1 for details.
To assign a Tally ID to a source in the database
1. Double-click the Sources node located under the Database node.
The Sources tab opens.
2. Verify that the Tally column displays in the Sources tab. If it does not, refer to the section “Enabling Tally ID
Support in the Active Database” on page 87.
3. Select the cell in the Tally column of the Sources tab to assign the Tally ID to.
4. Type the Tally ID you wish to assign to that source.
5. Press Enter to apply the change.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each source you wish to assign a Tally ID.
7. Click Apply at the bottom of the Sources tab to save your changes.

Assigning the Tally IDs to the Destinations

Assigning a Tally ID to a standard Ultricore destination (e.g. not a PiP, audio mixer destination, etc.), enables
currently routed source tally data to be output on a defined destination Tally ID, essentially routing the tally
information along with the video.
 An outgoing connection point (either ethernet server or RS232/422 port) is required for Ultricore to emit tally
information.

88 • Tallies Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Tally ID 51 follows the connected source associated
tally. This requires an established outgoing connection
point. (TSL UMD v3.1 and v4.0 TallyID format).
Tally Screen 4, ID 11 follows the connected source
associate tally. This requires an established outgoing
connection point. (TSL UMD v5.0 TallyID format).
The label of the source currently connected to DST 1
will be sent as TSL text on Tally ID 5. (TSL UMD v3.1
only).

When Tally ID 8 is asserted, any PiPs showing the same

source as routed to DST 1 also have their tally asserted
(if defined on the PiP). For example, if DST 1 has
source CAM 1 routed to it, and one or more Ultriscape
PiPs also had source CAM 1 displayed, the PiP would
display tally data from Tally ID 8.
The label of the source currently connected to
destination DST 1 will be output as text in a TSL 3.1
message with Tally ID 11. The Ultriscape PiP displays
the tally information from Tally ID 11 regardless of the
displayed source video.
The Ultriscape PiP displays tally information from the
connected source associated Tally ID.

Figure 11.2 Example of Destinations with Assigned Tally IDs

 Before proceeding, ensure you verify which TSL protocol you are using. The protocol determines how you must
enter the information into the Tally cells of the Destinations tab. Refer to Table 11.1 for details.
To assign a Tally ID to a destination in the database
1. Double-click the Destinations node located under the Database node.
The Destinations tab opens.
2. Verify that the Tally column displays in the Destinations tab. If it does not, refer to the section “Enabling
Tally ID Support in the Active Database” on page 87.
3. Select the cell in the Tally column of the Destinations tab to assign the Tally ID to.
4. Type the Tally ID you wish to assign to that destination.
5. Press Enter to apply the change.
6. Select the Tally Redirect box to enable the connected source Tally ID to be directed to this destination Tally
ID.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 for each destination you wish to assign a Tally ID.
8. Click Apply at the bottom of the Destinations tab to save your changes.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Tallies • 89

90 • Tallies Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Using Categories
Category navigation enables you to organize the sources, destinations, and/or levels in a router database to defined
categories. There are three types of categories each with independent interfaces:
• Group — allows a user to organize database resources (sources, destinations, and levels) into folders and
sub-folders with arbitrary group name. Resources may be assigned to multiple groups if required.
• Cat/Index — allows a user to piece together or build up the final resource name from category names and index
identifiers.
• Legacy — allows compatibility with earlier RCP-QE models. Note that this is not available as a soft panel.

Group Categories Overview

 Group category mode is only available when using an Ultrix router or Ultricore running software version 2.0 or
higher.
Group Category allows the user to organize database resources (sources, destinations, and levels) into folders and
sub-folders with arbitrary group names. The group name is not required to match the resource names (it is similar to
setting up file folders). This group categorization is useful when you need to group resources based on their
operational regions, events, personnel credentials etc.

Example of a Group Category Setup

A user wants to arrange sources and destinations based on the types of sports the network broadcasts: baseball and
football. The resources available are:
Sources Destinations

The resources need to be arranged into the following groups based on the sport type:
Baseball Football

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Categories • 91

 The Group Category interface would be used to arrange the resources into group categories:

Figure 12.1 Example of Group Categories Arrangement Based on Sport Type

Once the group categories are defined, the user can perform switches, on a hard or soft panel, based on the group
categories.
In the example below, the user uses RCP-QE18 to select the source labeled as HD 3.

Figure 12.2 RCP-QE18 — Selecting HD 3 via Category Mode

In the example below, the user uses a soft panel to select the destination labeled as SAT 1.

Figure 12.3 Ultricore — Selecting SAT 1 via a Soft Panel

92 • Using Categories Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Configuring Group Categories
Group categories are arranged in a hierarchy and displayed in a tree view. This is similar to the file system on your
PC where each group is represented as a folder or node, and the resources included in that group are nodes. Each
type of resource is represented within the hierarchy as follows: sources are green, destinations are blue, and levels
are red. (Figure 12.4)

Figure 12.4 Example of Group Categories Tree View

Configuring group categories requires:

1. Creating group names
2. Assigning destinations, sources, and/or levels to groups
3. Configuring a soft panel or a hard panel for use

Creating Group Names

For each database, you can create multiple category groups and add sub-groups. For example, Figure 12.4 shows
two main groups (MV, and SDI) where the SDI group also has four sub-groups (Slot1, Slot2, Slot3, and Slot4).
Once you create your groups, resources can be added.
 Ultricore does not support Unicode characters.
 By default, the groups are organized alphabetically in the tree view.
To create a category group
1. Double-click the Group Categories node located under the Database node.
The Group Categories tab opens.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Categories • 93

 2. Select the Group Categories: node.
3. Click Add.
The Add Group dialog opens.
4. In the Name field, type a unique identifier for the new group.
5. Click Apply.
The Add Group dialog closes and the new group is added as a child of the selected node.
In the example below, a new sub-group “Studio 1” was created below the SDI group.

6. Click Apply in the bottom right corner to apply your changes.

To create a category sub-group
1. In the Group Categories tree, select the group icon that you wish to add a sub-group to.
2. Click Add.
The Add Group dialog opens.
3. In the Name field, type a unique identifier for the new sub-group.
4. Click Apply.
The Add Group dialog closes and the new sub-group is added to the Group Categories tree view.
In the example below, a new sub-group “Cameras” was created within the Studio 1 group.

5. Click Apply in the bottom right corner to apply your changes.

94 • Using Categories Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 To move a group within the tree view
1. In the Group Categories tree, select the group you want to move.
The Move dialog opens. Notice that the dialog header displays the name of the selected group to move.
2. Use the tree view in the dialog to select where to move the group to.
In the example below the Audio sub-group was selected to move to the Studio 1 root.

3. Click Apply.
The Move dialog closes and the group displays in the selected position of the tree view.
4. Click Apply in the bottom right corner to apply your changes.

Auto Generating the Groups

You can also choose to create a group based on the levels, sources, and destinations in your database or a
combination. This requires the virtual labels for each resource to be consistent. For example, if all destinations are
labeled as Dest x, a group will be created called “Dest” with each destination listed as a separate node.
 Auto generating a group will delete the groups currently listed in the Group Categories tree view.
To auto generate a group
1. Click Auto Generate.
The Auto Generate Groups dialog opens.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Categories • 95

 2. Select the box to include the resources in the group.
3. Click Apply.
The Auto Generate Groups dialog closes and the Group Categories tree updates.
4. Click Apply in the bottom right corner to apply your changes.

Assigning Resources to a Group

Once a group is configured, you can assign resources (destinations, sources, levels).
To assign a resource to a group
1. In the Group Categories tree, select the group you want to add a resource to.
The middle pane of the Group Categories interface updates to list the sub-groups or resources assigned to it.
In the example below the area is blank because nothing is assigned to the selected group.

2. In the right pane, select the tab for the type of resource you wish to assign to the group.

96 • Using Categories Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 In the example above, the Destinations tab was selected.
3. To assign a single resource, select the resource from the tab.
4. To select a series of resources:
a. In the selected tab, select the first resource in the series you want to assign.
b. Press and hold Shift.
c. Click the last row in the series.
5. Click Assign.
The Group Categories tree updates to display the selected resources in the group.
In the example below, Dest 1 to Dest 6 were assigned to the Studio 1 group.

6. Click Apply in the bottom right corner to apply your changes.

To move a resource to another group
1. In the Group Categories tree, select the resource you want to move.
2. Click Move.
The Move dialog opens.
3. Select the new location for the resource.
4. Click Apply.
The Move dialog closes.
The Group Categories tree updates to display the resource in the new location. Notice that the resource is now
removed from the original group.
5. Click Apply in the bottom right corner to apply your changes.
To delete a resource from a group
1. In the Group Categories tree, select the specific resource you want to delete from the group.
2. Click Delete.
The Delete dialog opens.
3. Click Yes.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Categories • 97

 The Delete dialog closes.
The Group Categories tree updates to no longer display the resource in the group.
4. Click Apply in the bottom right corner to apply your changes.
To delete a series of resources from a group
1. In the Group Categories tree, select the specific group you want to edit.
The middle pane of the Group Categories interface updates to list the sub-groups or resources assigned to it.
2. In the middle pane, select the first resource in the series you want to delete.
3. Press and hold Shift.
4. Click the last row in the series.
5. Click Delete.
The Delete dialog opens.
6. Click Yes.
The Delete dialog closes.
The Group Categories tree updates to no longer display the resource in the group.
7. Click Apply in the bottom right corner to apply your changes.

Managing the Groups

 You cannot rename resources using the options in the Group Categories interface.
To rename a group
1. In the Group Categories tree, select the specific group you want to rename.
2. Click Rename.
The Rename Group dialog opens.
3. Use the Name field to enter a unique identifier for the selected group.
4. Click Apply.
The Rename Group dialog closes.
The Group Categories tree updates to display the new name for the group.
5. Click Apply in the bottom right corner to apply your changes.
To delete a group
1. In the Group Categories tree, select the group you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
The Delete dialog opens.
3. Click Yes.
The Delete dialog closes.
The Group Categories tree updates to no longer display the group.
4. Click Apply in the bottom right corner to apply your changes.

98 • Using Categories Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Cat/Index Categories Overview
Cat/Index category mode (also referred to as Category Index mode), allows alpha-numeric extensions to labels to
'build up' the final label selection. For example, VTR 1 - 6 may be expressed as a VTR label with numerical
extensions 1 through 6. Similarly, alpha extensions may be used, for example, VTR A - E for VTRs A through E.
Destination and source names are split into substrings - the first substring traditionally referred to as the category,
and subsequent substrings the indexes (e.g. Category VTR index 1 through 6). As source/destination names
become more complex, an index may not be the final part of the selection name. For example, consider the source
names CG TX 1 and CG TX 2; Cat/Index category mode may be configured so that a user selects CG, then TX, then
either 1 or 2. This may be extrapolated to cover a large range of sources and destinations.

Example of a Cat/Index Category Setup

The resources available are:
Sources / Destination Names

The possible categories and indexes would be:

Categories Indexes
CAM_ a 1 5 D

SAT_ 2 A E
CG_ 3 B RX_
EDIT_ 4 C TX_
VTR
a. The “_” characters represents a blank space. This indicates the category will filter
resources with a space in the name (e.g. the CAM_ category will allow resources
named CAM 1, CAM 2 but not CAM3).

Once the Cat/Index categories are defined, the user can perform switches, on a hard or soft panel, based on the
categories.
In the example below, a RCP-QE18 is used to select the source labeled as CAM 1. Notice that only the sources are
available for the second button selection. In this example, the user would need to select TAKE to make the switch.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Categories • 99

 Figure 12.5 RCP-QE18 — Selecting CAM 1 via Category Mode

In the example below, an Ultricore soft panel is used to select the destination labeled as CG RX 2.

Figure 12.6 Ultricore — Selecting CG RX 2 via a Soft Panel

Configuring a Cat/Index Category Setup

Configuring Cat/Index categories requires:
1. Assigning categories
2. Assigning indexes
3. Configuring a soft panel or a hard panel for use

Assigning Categories
You can assign each destination to a specific category or multiple categories in a database. Using multiple
categories enable you to filter the destinations, and organize them into logical groups. By default, categories are
organized in alphabetical order.

100 • Using Categories Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 To auto generate categories based on a database
1. Double-click the Cat/Index Categories node located under the Database node.
The Cat/Index Categories tab opens.

2. Click Generate.
The Auto-Generate dialog opens.
3. Click Yes.
The Auto-Generate dialog closes.
All previous categories are deleted from the Categories pane and new ones are listed based on the resource
labels in your database.
4. Click Apply.
To manually create categories
1. In the Cat/Index Categories tab, click Add.
The Add Category dialog opens.
2. Use the Name field to specify a unique identifier for the new category.
 The entry must match a resource name prefix.
Some example entries would be:
• “CG_” creates a category to categorize resources named CG_xxxx where xxxx is any index.
• “CG” creates a category to categorize resources named CGxxxx where xxxx is any index.
• “cg” will not categorize any resources as the category names are case sensitive.
3. Select the Insert trailing space box to represent a space character with the “_” symbol.
4. Click Apply.
The Add Category dialog closes.
The new category is listed in the Categories pane.
5. Click Apply.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Categories • 101

 Assigning Indexes
An index for a category enables you to filter resources. For example:
• “TX_” creates a sub-index of TX, meaning further entry is required on the control panel. This will filter resources
named <category name>TX_xxxx where xxxx is any index.
• “TX 1” creates an ‘end-point’ index, meaning TX 1 is the last substring and no further entry is required on a
control panel. This will filter resources named <category name>TX 1. You cannot create an index of “TX 1”
and a sub-index of “TX_”. You must choose one or the other.
As category names and indexes are entered, the affected Resources list in the interface will update to indicate which
sources or destinations of a given category is accessible on a control panel. Select a category name in the categories
list to see which source or destinations are in that category and filtered by the available Indexes list.
To manually create categories
1. Double-click the Cat/Index Categories node located under the Database node.
The Cat/Index Categories tab opens
2. Click Add (located next to the Categories pane).
The Add Category dialog opens.
3. Use the Name field to specify a unique identifier for the new category.
 The entry must match a resource name prefix.
For example:
• “CG_” creates a category to categorize resources named CG_xxxx where xxxx is any index.
• “CG” creates a category to categorize resources named CGxxxx where xxxx is any index.
• “cg” will not categorize any resources as the category names are case sensitive.
4. Select the Insert trailing space box to represent a space character with the “_” symbol.
5. Click Apply.
The Add Category dialog closes.
The new category is listed in the Categories pane.
6. Click Apply.
To create a category for a specific resource type
1. Double-click the Cat/Index Categories node located under the Database node.
The Cat/Index Categories tab opens.
2. Click Create for the resource type you wish to filter.
The Create Category/Index dialog opens.
3. Use the Category Name field to specify the characters for the new index filter.
 The entry must match a partial resource name.
4. Select the Insert trailing space box if you wish to include trailing spaces in the filter.
5. Click Apply.
The Create Category/Index dialog closes.
6. Click Apply.

Assigning Index Filters

An index for a category enables you to filter resources. As category names and indexes are entered, the Affected
Resources pane in the interface will update to indicate which sources or destinations of a given category is

102 • Using Categories Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 accessible on a control panel. Select a name in the Categories pane to see which source or destinations are in that
category and filtered by the available Indexes pane.
To assign an index filter
1. Double-click the Cat/Index Categories node located under the Database node.
The Cat/Index Categories tab opens.
2. Click Add (located next to the Indexes pane).
The Add Index dialog opens.
3. Use the Name field to specify a new index filter.
 The entry must match a partial resource name.
For example:
• “TX_” creates a sub-index of TX, meaning further entry is required on the control panel. This will filter
resources named <category name>TX_xxxx where xxxx is any index.
• “TX 1” creates an ‘end-point’ index, meaning TX 1 is the last substring and no further entry is required on a
control panel. This will filter resources named <category name>TX 1.
• Note that you would not create an index of “TX 1” and a sub-index of “TX_”. You must choose one or the
other.
4. Click Apply.
The Add Index dialog closes.
The new index filter is listed in the Indexes pane.
5. Click Apply.
To assign an index filter for a specific resource type
1. Double-click the Cat/Index Categories node located under the Database node.
The Cat/Index Categories tab opens.
2. Click Create for the resource type you wish to filter.
The Create Category/Index dialog opens.
3. Use the Index Name field to specify a unique identifier for the new index filter.
 The entry must match a partial resource name.
4. Select the Insert trailing space box if you wish to include trailing spaces in the filter.
5. Click Apply.
The Create Category/Index dialog closes.
6. Click Apply.

Legacy Categories Overview

Legacy Category mode allows some category functionality on older RCP-QE control panels (17 button). There is
no soft panel for Legacy Category Mode. Legacy mode is similar in operation to Group category mode with some
elements of the index functionality of the Cat/Index Category mode.
Legacy mode limitations;
• A destination or source cannot be in more than one category
• Only numerical indexes are supported

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Categories • 103

 For More Information on...
• the legacy category mode, refer to the RCP-QE User Guide.

Configuring Legacy Categories

Source and destination selection may be achieved in two ways: direct selection or numerical index entry. The setup
of the Ultricore Category tables determines the operational functionality.

Category Direct Selection Mode

Figure 12.7 illustrates the Categories configured in the Ultricore database for direct selection mode.

Figure 12.7 Ultricore — Entries in the Categories Tab

Figure 12.8 illustrates direct destination entries and the resulting available destinations in the selected category.

Figure 12.8 Ultricore — Resulting Operation

To set up direct selection in categories

1. Display the Categories tab in DashBoard for the Ultricore as follows:
a. Expand the Database node in the Tree View.
b. Double-click the Categories node.
2. Click Destination or Source as required.
3. Type the text for a category name in column 'Category 1' for each row that is required to be in that category.
4. Copy the items in the name column to the Category 2 column.
 You can use keyboard shortcuts such as Ctrl+C (copy) and Ctrl+V (paste) and Shift+click to select a range for
ease of data entry.
This will result in those rows being within the category you named in column Category 1.

Numerical Index Entry Mode

Figure 12.9 illustrates the Categories configured in the Ultricore database for numerical entry mode.

104 • Using Categories Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Figure 12.9 Ultricore — Entries in the Categories Tab

Because we have set the VTRs numbered 6 through 10 in Figure 12.9, the Ultricore expects a two digit entry
signified by the two underlines on the button next to the category name. As only numerals 1 or 0 are the only
possible entries to make for the first digit, the Ultricore has blanked the invalid entry keys. (Figure 12.10)
To select VTR 6, press 0 then the remaining available numbers will become available, then press 6 to finish the
selection.

Figure 12.10 Ultricore — Resulting Operation

To set up numerical index selection in categories

1. Display the Categories tab in DashBoard for the Ultricore as follows:
a. Expand the Database node in the Tree View.
b. Double-click the Categories node.
2. Click Destination or Source as required.
3. Enter a category name in the Category 1 column for each row that is required to be in that category. For
example, in Figure 12.9 the user entered “VTR”.
4. Enter a number in the Category 2 column.
This will result in those rows being within the category you named in the Category 1 column. These
destinations are accessible via entering the numerical extension of the required destination. For example, in
Figure 12.9 the user entered “6” for row 5.

Creating a Soft Panel with Categories

Once you have defined your categories and tags for each level of a database, you can create a custom soft panel
using the category settings as a basic for arranging the sources, destinations, and levels.
For More Information on...
• managing your Category panels, refer to the section “Using Category Panels” on page 125.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Categories • 105

106 • Using Categories Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Soft Panels in DashBoard
A soft panel is a software implementation of a physical remote control panel (RCP). The soft panel configurations
are part of a database so any instance of DashBoard connecting to a given Ultricore has the defined soft panels
available. You can customize a soft panel by defining the sources, destinations, levels, and/or salvos that will be
available on the panel interface. Ultricore provides the following types of soft panels for control;
• Matrix — the destinations and sources are organized into a grid layout.
• MultiBus — the destinations and sources are organized into separate a rows (buses) of buttons.
• Cat/Index Category — the resources are defined using a defined set of search criteria (indexes).
• Group Category — the destinations and sources are grouped by pre-defined categories.
• Ultritouch PB — the resources are organized into a customized layout that is pre-sized for an Ultritouch hard
panel. Refer to the Ultritouch + Ultricore User Guide for details.
• Push Button — similar layout and features of the Ultritouch PB panel but sized for use on a computer monitor.

Before You Begin

Keep the following in mind when managing your soft panels in DashBoard:
• Soft panels require the setup of the database source/destinations/levels and port assignment to be complete.
• If the database changes (source/destination/level/salvo addition or deletion), you will need to edit the soft panel
configuration to ensure the correct sources/destinations/levels/salvos are visible.
• Ultricore does not support Unicode characters.
For More Information on...
• databases, refer to the chapter “Database Configuration” on page 63.

Soft Panels Overview

A soft panel is created using the options in the Panels interface for your database. Soft panels are listed as sub-nodes
under the Soft Panels node in the Tree View of DashBoard. Double-click a sub-node to display the corresponding
soft panel in the DashBoard window. The hierarchy of the nodes in the tree is determined by their Panel ID which is
assigned when the soft panel is created in the database. In Figure 13.1 there are seven soft panels in the tree view.

Figure 13.1 Example of a Soft Panels Tree View

A soft panel can be as simple or complex in its layout as you require. The Panels interface enables you to specify
the number of destinations, sources, levels, and salvos displayed on your panel. You select a soft panel type and
specify the elements of the soft panel including giving the panel a unique name.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 107

 For More Information on...
• Matrix panels, refer to the section “Using Matrix Panels” on page 116.
• Multibus panels, refer to the section “Using MultiBus Panels” on page 122.
• Category panels, refer to the section “Using Category Panels” on page 125.
• Ultritouch PB panels, refer to the Ultritouch + Ultrix User Guide.
• Push Button panels, refer to the section “Using Push Button Panels” on page 129

Enabling Machine Control

Typically, the ports on a data router (such as the NK-M series routers) are bi-directional where there is both a
transmit (input to output) and reciprocal receive connection that is made for each port. For example, a switch from
port 1 to port 2 involves a forward path (from port 1 input to port 2 output) and the reciprocal connection from (port
2 input to port 1 output).
In some cases however, there is a need to connect on the port's input to several ports’ output (e.g. one device
commanding many target devices) without making the reciprocal connection. This allows the commanding device
to just broadcast commands and not receive from the many devices it communicates with.
When configuring a soft panel, you have the option to add a Machine Control button to the panel. When selected on
the panel, this Machine Control button sends a Take request directed to an NK-M series data router to automatically
make the reciprocal port switch. On a video router, the connection is all one way from an input port to an output
port (e.g. such as from IN 1 to OUT 2).

Creating a Soft Panel

Soft panels are listed under the Soft Panels node in a hierarchy as determined by their Panel ID. When you create a
new soft panel, you select from the three existing soft panel types: Matrix, MultiBus, and Categories. You then
assign a Panel Name and ID to display in the tree view using the nomenclature “Panel Name [#]” where [#] is
the Panel ID.
 A Default Panel is available that is a MultiBus style with 1 level, 4 destinations, and 4 sources.
To create a soft panel
1. Double-click the Panels node located under the Database node.
The Panels tab opens.

2. Click Edit > Add.

The Add Panel dialog opens.

108 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 3. Type a unique identifier in the Name field. This will be used to identify the panel in the tree under the Soft
Panels node.
4. Use the Style menu to specify the type of panel to create. Choose from the following:
• Matrix — Creates a soft panel that organizes the destinations and sources in a grid layout.
• MultiBus — Creates a soft panel where destinations and sources are organized into separate buses.
• Category — Creates a soft panel where destinations and sources are arranged as determined by the
Category tab. Refer to the chapter “Using Categories” on page 91 for more information.
• Push Button — Creates a soft panel that organizes the destinations and sources in a distinct vertical layout.
• Ultritouch PB — Creates a soft panel that is used on an Ultritouch hard panel. Refer to the Ultritouch +
Ultricore User Guide for details.
5. Click Apply to save your settings and close the Add Panel dialog.
The new panel name is added to the Save Panels list of the Panels tab and automatically selected in the tab for
editing.
6. Select the Info tab.
7. Use the Panel ID menu to determine the position of the panel in the Soft Panels tree where a value of “1” is the
highest priority (and listed at the top).
 Ensure that the new soft panel does not use the same Panel ID as a previously saved panel.
8. Use the Description field to provide a textual summary of the panel.
9. Use the Protection Operation menu to provides options for preventing crosspoint switches. Choose from the
following:
• Enable — The Lock, Protect, and Free buttons display on the soft panel. Refer to the section “Using
Matrix Panels” on page 116 or “Using MultiBus Panels” on page 122 for a description of these buttons.
• Disables — The Lock, Protect, and Free buttons do not display on the soft panel. These protection options
are not available for the soft panel.
10. Use the Take Operation menu to configure the Take button for the soft panel. Choose from the following:
• Confirm — Displays a Take button on the soft panel. You must select the Take button to perform a
crosspoint switch.
• Direct — The soft panel does not display a Take button. A crosspoint switch occurs automatically after each
destination/source selection made by the user on the soft panel.
11. If you selected MultiBus in step 4, use the Selection Operation menu to enable multiple crosspoint/level
selections and display the Multi Select button. Choose from the following:
• Single — Disables this feature. The Multi Select button does not display on the soft panel.
• Multi — The Multi Select button displays on the soft panel.
12. Use the Machine Control menu to control whether a Take request directed to an Ross NK-M series data router
automatically makes a reciprocal port switch. Choose from the following:
• Enable — Displays a Machine Control button on the soft panel. You must select the Machine Control
button to enable the reciprocal port switch on the NK-M series router.
• Disable — The soft panel does not display a Machine Control button. This is the default setting.
13. If you set the Style to Push Button, proceed to the section “Configuring a Push Button Soft Panel” on
page 131.
14. Click Apply to save your new soft panel.
The new panel displays in the Soft Panels tree. In the example below, there are seven panels in the tree view.
Note that the Priority ID is the value displayed in the [#] brackets.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 109

 15. Continue to the next sections to add levels, destinations, sources, and salvos to your soft panel as required.

Levels for the Soft Panel

You can specify the total number of levels available on the soft panel to the user. For example, if you set the
Viewable levels to 6 but have assigned 8 levels to the panel, only the first six levels in the Assigned list are
displayed.
To specify the levels for the soft panel
1. Double-click the soft panel name from the Panels list in the left toolbar of the Panels tab.
2. Select the Levels tab.
3. Use the Viewable levels field to specify the total number of levels for the soft panel.
4. To add a level to the soft panel:
a. From the Available list, select the level(s) you wish to add to the soft panel.
b. Click .
The Assigned list updates to include the selected level(s).

5. To assign all the available levels in the database to the soft panel, click .
6. To assign multiple levels to the soft panel:
a. From the Available list, select the first level you wish to add to the soft panel.
b. Press Shift.
c. From the Available list, select the other level(s) you wish to add to the soft panel.
d. Click .
The Assigned list updates to include the selected levels.

110 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 7. Use the provided buttons beside the Assigned list to determine the order in which the levels are displayed on
the soft panel.
8. Click Apply at the bottom of the Panels tab to save your settings.

Destinations for the Soft Panel

You can create a soft panel with a specified number of destinations and determine the order in which they are
displayed in the crosspoint row of the panel. For example, the database may have 32 destinations but you only want
to make the first 4 outputs selectable on the crosspoint row of your soft panel. You would then set the Viewable
destinations to 4. You can also specify the order in which the destination buttons are displayed on the soft panel.
To specify the destinations for the soft panel
1. Double-click the soft panel name from the Panels list in the left toolbar of the Panels tab.
2. Select the Destinations tab.

3. Use the Viewable destinations field to specify the total number of destinations for the soft panel.
4. To add a destination to the soft panel:
a. From the Available list, select the destination(s) you wish to add to the soft panel.
b. Click .
The Assigned list updates to include the selected destination(s).

5. To assign all the available destinations in the database to the soft panel, click .
6. To assign multiple destinations to the soft panel:
a. From the Available list, select the first destination you wish to add to the soft panel.
b. Press Shift.
c. From the Available list, select the other destination(s) you wish to add to the soft panel.
d. Click .
The Assigned list updates to include the selected destinations.
7. Use the provided buttons beside the Assigned list to determine the order in which the destinations are
displayed on the soft panel.
8. Click Apply at the bottom of the Panels tab to save your settings.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 111

 Sources for the Soft Panel
You can create a soft panel with a specified number of sources and determine the order in which they are displayed
in the crosspoint row of the panel. For example, the router may have 64 sources but you only want to make the first
12 inputs selectable on the crosspoint row of your soft panel. You could set the Viewable sources to 12 or assign
only those 12 inputs to the soft panel. You can also specify the order in which the source buttons are displayed on
the soft panel.
To specify the sources for the soft panel
1. Double-click the soft panel name from the Panels list in the left toolbar of the Panels tab.
2. Select the Sources tab.
3. Use the Viewable sources field to specify the total number of sources for the soft panel.
4. To add a source to the soft panel:
a. From the Available list, select the source(s) you wish to add to the soft panel.
b. Click .
The Assigned list updates to include the selected source(s).

5. To assign all the available sources in the database to the soft panel, click .
6. To assign multiple sources to the soft panel:
a. From the Available list, select the first source you wish to add to the soft panel.
b. Press Shift.
c. From the Available list, select the other source(s) you wish to add to the soft panel.
d. Click .
The Assigned list updates to include the selected sources.
7. Use the provided buttons beside the Assigned list to determine the order in which the sources are displayed on
the soft panel.
8. Click Apply at the bottom of the Panels tab to save your settings.

Salvos for the Soft Panel

Before you can add salvos to a soft panel, you must configure them as outlined in the section “Creating Salvos” on
page 137.

112 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 To specify the salvos available on the soft panel
1. Double-click the soft panel name from the Panels list in the left toolbar of the Panels tab.
2. Select the Salvos tab.

3. Use the Viewable salvos field to specify the total number of salvos for the soft panel.
4. To add a salvo to the soft panel:
a. From the Available list, select the salvo you wish to add to the soft panel.
b. Click .
The Assigned list updates to include the selected source(s).

5. To assign all the available salvos in the database to the soft panel, click .
6. To assign multiple salvos to the soft panel:
a. From the Available list, select the first salvo you wish to add to the soft panel.
b. Press Shift.
c. From the Available list, select the other salvo(s) you wish to add to the soft panel.
d. Click .
The Assigned list updates to include the selected salvos.
7. Use the provided buttons beside the Assigned list to determine the order in which the salvos are displayed on
the soft panel.
8. Click Apply at the bottom of the Panels tab to save your settings.

Copying a Soft Panel

 Ensure the soft panel is currently not in use.
To copy a soft panel
1. Double-click the Panels node located under the Database node.
The Panels tab opens.
2. From the Panels list in the left toolbar, select the soft panel to copy.
3. Click Edit > Copy.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 113

 4. Click Edit > Paste.
The Panels tab updates to display the settings for the selected soft panel. New soft panels are automatically
named “New Panel #” where # is an auto-generated value.
5. Select the Info tab.
6. Type a unique identifier in the Panel Name field. This will be used to identify the panel in the tree under the
Soft Panels node.
7. Click Apply at the bottom of the Panels tab to save the new soft panel. This also helps to ensure that you do not
mistakenly edit the original panel that you copied.

Editing a Soft Panel

Once you edit a soft panel, you must re-load the soft panel if it was in use prior to the edit.
 Ensure the soft panel is currently not in use.
To edit a soft panel
1. Double-click the Panels node located under the Database node.
The Panels tab opens.
2. From the Panels list in the left toolbar, select the soft panel to edit.
The Panels tab updates to display the settings for the selected soft panel.
3. Edit the settings for the panel using one of the following procedures:
 You cannot edit the Panel Style of a soft panel.
• “To specify the levels for the soft panel” on page 110
• “To specify the destinations for the soft panel” on page 111
• “To specify the sources for the soft panel” on page 112
• “To specify the salvos available on the soft panel” on page 113
4. Click Apply at the bottom of the Panels tab to save the new settings.
5. If a dialog opens to remind you that the affected soft panel is currently in use:
a. Click OK to close the dialog.
b. Perform the procedure “To re-load a soft panel”.
To re-load a soft panel
1. Close the newly edited soft panel as follows:
a. Locate the tab for the soft panel in the DashBoard client window.

b. Click to close the tab.

2. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore.
3. Double-click the node for the newly edited soft panel.
The tab for the selected soft panel opens.

Deleting a Soft Panel from the Database

 Ensure the soft panel is currently not in use.
To delete a soft panel from the database
1. Double-click the Panels node located under the Database node.
The Panels tab opens.

114 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 2. Select the soft panel name from the Panels list in the left toolbar.
3. Click Edit > Delete.
4. Click Apply at the bottom of the Panels tab.

Using the Lock and Protect Features

Whether your soft panel includes the Lock and Protect features depends on the panel type. The Matrix and Category
panels can include the Lock, Protect, and Free buttons. The MultiBus panels can include only the Lock button.
Soft panels that have their Protection Operation set to Enable also display these buttons (depending on the panel
type).
For More Information on...
• the Protection Operation, refer to Table 19.26 on page 211.

Using a Lock
If your soft panel includes a Lock button, you have the option to protect source/level and destination/level pairs.
When another control panel or DashBoard client attempts to switch that combination, the request will be denied.
To lock a source/level pair
1. Display the soft panel in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the source/level pairs from the soft panel interface.
3. Click Lock.
The label on the button changes to Unlock and the button remains lit.
To lock a destination/level pair
1. Display the soft panel in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the destination/level pairs from the soft panel interface.
3. Click Lock.
The label on the button changes to Unlock and the button remains lit.
To clear a lock
• Click the Unlock button.
The label on the button changes to Lock and the button remains lit.

Using a Protect
A soft panel can be locked by clicking the Protect button. The button is lit until pressed again. A protect alarm
message is displayed in the System Status tab when an output is protected.
This feature protects the currently selected destination/level pair from use by other sources, as well as from other
linked panels. The Protect button is especially useful in instances where a destination must be held after a switch
has been made.
To apply a protect
• Click Protect.
The button is lit. Selecting crosspoints will not take effect and the panel does not update when buttons are
pressed.
To clear a protect
• Click Protect.
The button is no longer lit and crosspoint switches can be initiated.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 115

 Using Matrix Panels
Matrix panels enable you to perform direct take transitions, and local salvo definitions using a grid of sources and
destinations.

Panel Interface Overview

Each level is represented as a button in the color defined in the current database. Notice that the crosspoints are
represented in the same color as the applicable level.

Figure 13.2 Example of a Matrix Panel

1. Crosspoints
The number of Destinations and Sources available in the matrix is specified using the Destinations and Sources
interfaces.Click within the matrix or click the Destination and Source buttons to select the crosspoints for
switching the selected levels. In Figure 13.2 crosspoints were selected using the Advanced > Diagonal Presets
option.
2. Levels Button
Click a level button to include the level in the next crosspoint switch. A lit button indicates that the
corresponding level will be included in the next transition. The color and name of the button are specified using
the Levels interface. Figure 13.2 illustrates a Matrix panel with nine levels selected.
3. Follow Button
Click this button to select all crosspoints in the matrix. Clicking TAKE after clicking Follow will then switch all
crosspoints at the same time on all available levels.
4. TAKE Button
Click this button to execute the switch between crosspoints. If you are using a soft panel with the Take
Operation set to Direct, a TAKE button is not displayed because the transitions will occur automatically after a
crosspoint switch is selected.
5. Lock Button
Click this button to prevent switching of the selected crosspoints. If you are using a soft panel with the
Protection Operation set to Disable, the Lock and Protect buttons are not displayed.
6. Protect Button
Click this button to prevent switching of the selected crosspoints except in the DashBoard client session the
Protect was initiated in.

116 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 7. Free Button
Click this button to end a lock or protect on the selected crosspoints.
8. Salvo Button
Click this button to display the Salvo menu. Refer to the “Salvo Menus” on page 224 for information on the
menu options.
9. Advanced Button
Click this button to display the Advanced menu. Refer to the section “Advanced Menus” on page 209 for
information on the menu options.
10.Machine Control Button (not shown)
If you are using a soft panel with the Machine Control set to Enabled, the MACHINE CONTROL button is
displayed. Refer to the section “Enabling Machine Control” on page 108 for details on this button.

Crosspoint Switches via a Matrix Panel

Crosspoint selections can be made using the cross-hairs or clicking the required Destination and Source buttons on
the panel. This section provides instructions using the cross-hairs for crosspoint selections.
To make a crosspoint switch using a single level
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore.
2. Double-click the node for a matrix soft panel.
The Matrix Panel tab opens.
3. Select a level from the left toolbar.
The button is now lit.
4. Select the source and destination intersection inside the matrix.
The selection is represented as an icon set in the color that matches the level. In the example below, Level 2,
Src 4 and Dest 2 are selected. The TAKE button is now lit.

5. Click Take.
The icon on the matrix is solid in the color that matches the level and the TAKE button is no longer lit.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 117

 To make a crosspoint switch between multiple sources and destinations on a single level
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore.
2. Double-click the node for a matrix soft panel.
The Matrix Panel tab opens.
3. Select a level from the left toolbar.
4. Select the first source and destinations inside the matrix.
5. Select the additional crosspoints to switch.
In the example below, Level 2 is selected but seven crosspoint switches are also selected (each is represented
with a green icon on the matrix).

6. Click TAKE.
The icons on the matrix is solid in the color that matches the level and the TAKE button is no longer lit.
To make a crosspoint switch on multiple levels
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore.
2. Double-click the node for a matrix soft panel.
The Matrix Panel tab opens.
3. Select each level from the toolbar or select Follow to include all levels.
4. Select the first source and destination inside the matrix.
5. Select the additional crosspoints to switch.
When multiple levels are selected, the circle on the crosspoint is divided into colored sections with each section
representing a level. In th example below, Levels 2, 4, and 6 are selected with multiple crosspoint selections on
the matrix.

118 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 6. Click Take.
The icons on the matrix are solid in the color that matches the level and the TAKE button is no longer lit.
To perform a crosspoint switch on multiple destinations with a single source
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore.
2. Double-click the node for a matrix soft panel.
The Matrix Panel tab opens.
3. Select each level from the toolbar or select Follow to include all levels.
4. Click Select All located at the top left corner of the interface.
All the Dest buttons on the Matrix panel are now lit and selected. The Select All button is labeled Clear All.
5. From the top toolbar, select the Src button to switch.
The matrix updates to indicate the crosspoint switches that will occur on the next transition to the same source.
The TAKE button is now lit. For example, Levels 2, 4 and 6 are selected and all destinations switch to Src 4.

6. Click TAKE.
The icons on the matrix are solid in the color that matches the level and the TAKE button is no longer lit.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 119

 Using a Default Preset
The Advanced menu provides two pre-configured presets: Diagonal and R-Diagonal.

Diagonal Presets
Crosspoint selection is organized into a diagonal line that starts with the top left corner of the matrix (e.g. Src 1 and
Dest 1), continues in single step intervals (e.g. Src 2 and Dest 2, Src 3 and Dest 3 etc.) and ends with the bottom
right corner of the matrix (e.g. Src1 6 and Dest 16).
To use the Diagonal Preset
1. Select each level from the toolbar or select Follow to include all levels.
2. Click Advanced > Diagonal Presets.

3. Click TAKE.

R-Diagonal Presets
Crosspoint selection is organized into a diagonal line that starts with the top right corner of the matrix (e.g. Src 16
and Dest 1), continues in single step intervals (e.g. Src 15 and Dest 2, Src 14 and Dest 3 etc.) and ends with the
bottom left corner of the matrix (e.g. Src 1 and Dest 16).
To use the R-Diagonal Preset
1. Select each level from the toolbar or select Follow to include all levels.
2. Click Advanced > R-Diagonal Presets.

120 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 3. Click TAKE.

Creating an Automatic Switching Loop

The Automation feature enables you to set up a crosspoint and create a continuous switch loop using the specified
crosspoints.
To set up an automated crosspoint selection loop
1. Click Advanced > Setup Automation.
The Automation Setup menu opens.

2. Use the Repeat Interval field to specify the number seconds the crosspoint switch will continuously loop for.
3. Use the Levels menu to specify the levels the crosspoint will include.
4. Use the Destinations menu to select the outputs on the router.
5. Use the Sources menu to select the input signals to route to the output for the switch.
6. Click Start.
The menu closes and the crosspoint switch begins. The loop continues for the length of time specified in step 2.
 To stop the loop, click Advanced > Stop Automation.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 121

 Clearing the Matrix Selections
You can choose to clear all the crosspoint selections, or only the selected Destinations.
To clear all crosspoint selections on the matrix
• Click Advanced > Clear All Presets.
To clear only the Destination selections on the matrix
• Click Advanced > Clear Dest Presets, or
• Click Clear All.

Using MultiBus Panels

The MultiBus panel provides breakaway control and status monitoring of several destinations simultaneously.

Panel Interface Overview

Use the MultiBus Panel to send a source to multiple destinations.

Figure 13.3 Example of a MultiBus Panel

1. Destination Bus
Each button in this crosspoint row represents a configured output for the selected router. Selecting a button
includes the destination in the next crosspoint switch. The number of destinations and label for each button is
defined by its entry in the Destinations interface. A destination selected to be included in the next crosspoint
switch will have a lit button. For example, Dest 2 is selected in Figure 13.3.
2. Lock Button
Click this button to prevent switching of the selected crosspoints. If you are using a soft panel with the
Protection Operation set to Disable, the Lock button is not displayed.
3. Take Button
Click this button to execute the switch between the selected crosspoints. If you are using a soft panel with the
Take Operation set to Direct, a TAKE button is not displayed because the transitions will occur automatically
after a crosspoint switch is selected.

122 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 4. Preset Button
When this button is lit, a new crosspoint switch is set up on the soft panel. At least one source, once destination,
and one level are selected on the interface (the Dest and Src buttons are lit blue to indicate their inclusion in the
next switch).
 When this button is not lit, the crosspoint switch setup is still valid but is no longer indicated on the soft panel.
If you are using a soft panel with the Take Operation set to Confirm, the crosspoint switch will take effect the
next time the TAKE button is selected. If you are using a soft panel with the Take Operation set to Direct, a
TAKE button is not displayed because the transitions occurred automatically (hot-punch operation).

5. Clear Button
Clicking this button clears the selections made for the next crosspoint switch in the soft panel interface.
6. Multi Select Button
Clicking this button enables you to perform a switch on multiple crosspoint combinations. If you are using a soft
panel with the Selection Operation set to Single, a Multi Select button is not displayed.
7. Level Button(s)
Click a level button to include the level in a crosspoint that you are configuring in the matrix. A lit button
indicates that the corresponding level will be included in the next transition. The color and name of the button are
specified using the Levels interface. Figure 13.3 illustrates a MultiBus panel with three levels selected.
8. Follow Button
Click this button to select all levels in the matrix. If you are using a soft panel with the Take Operation set to
Confirm, pressing Take after pressing Follow will then switch all crosspoints at the same time on all available
levels.
9. Source Bus
Each button in this crosspoint row represents a configured input for the selected router. Selecting a button
includes the source in the next crosspoint switch. The label for the button is defined by its entry in the Sources
tab of the Database. A source selected to be included in the next crosspoint switch will have a lit button. For
example, in Figure 13.3 the Src 1 is selected for the next transition while the Src 4 is the current source in use.
10.Machine Control Button (not shown)
If you are using a soft panel with the Machine Control set to Enabled, the MACHINE CONTROL button is
displayed. Refer to the section “Enabling Machine Control” on page 108 for details on this button.

Crosspoint Switches via a MultiBus Panel

The layout of a MultiBus panel is similar to a production switcher layout where the destinations are organized into
a horizontal row of buttons near the top of the panel and the sources are on the row near the bottom.
To make a crosspoint switch on a single level using a MultiBus Panel
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore.
2. Double-click the node for a MultiBus Panel.
The MultiBus Panel tab opens.
3. From the left toolbar, select the button for the level you want to perform the crosspoint switch.
4. Select a Src button from the Source bus located at the bottom of the interface.
The button is now lit.
5. Select the Dest button(s) from the Destination bus located at the top of the interface.
6. Select a Dest button from the Destination bus located at the top of the interface.
The Dest, Preset, and Take buttons are now lit.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 123

 In the example below, Level 2 is selected and Dest 4 will switch with Src 6. The Src 1 button is lit green to
indicate that Source 1 was used in the last crosspoint switch.

7. Click Take.
To make a crosspoint switch using multiple levels
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore.
2. Double-click the node for a MultiBus Panel.
The MultiBus Panel tab opens.
3. Select each level from the toolbar or select Follow to include all levels.
When multiple levels are selected, the center row of the panel reports the level status using a horizontal bar to
represent the level.
4. Select a Src button from the Source bus located at the bottom of the interface.
The button is now lit.
5. Select the Dest buttons for the outputs to include in the crosspoint switch.
The Dest, Preset, and Take buttons are now lit. In the example below, Follow is selected and Dest 5 will
switch with Src 4 on all levels.

6. Click TAKE.

124 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Using the Multi Select Function
A MultiBus panel displays a Multi Select button on the vertical toolbar of the panel.
To use the Multi Select
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore.
2. Double-click the node for a MultiBus Panel.
The MultiBus Panel tab opens.
3. Select the level(s) from the left toolbar.
4. Click Multi Select.
The Multi Select button is now lit.
5. Select the Dest buttons from the Destination bus located near the top of the interface.
The Dest buttons are now lit.
6. Select a Src button from the Source bus located near the bottom of the interface.
The Src, Preset, and TAKE buttons are now lit. In the example below, Levels 2 and 3 are selected, and Dest 2,
3, and 5 will switch with Src 6.

7. Click TAKE.

Using Category Panels

Category panels organize sources, destinations and levels based on the settings in the Category tab. There are two
types of category panels: group and classic. This section outlines both types.
For More Information on...
• legacy categories, refer to the RCP-QE User Guide.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 125

 Panel Interface Overview
The soft panel interface for each category type is similar in layout and available buttons.

Figure 13.4 Example of a Group Category Soft Panel for an Ultricore Router

1. Group Window
This area of the soft panel interface may include the following buttons:
› SOURCES, DESTINATIONS Buttons — Clicking one of these buttons updates the button matrix to display the
sources or destinations available as per the selected category. The button labels update to display the source or
destination labels.
› BACK Button — Click this button to return the navigation to the previous category selection (back one level).
› RESET Button — Click this button to clear all selections on the interface. This button is only available on the
Classic Category soft panels.
› SELECT Button — This button is only available on the Classic Category soft panels.
› TOP Button — This button is only available on the Group Category soft panels.
 When using a Group Category soft panel and the Info > Non-group Resources setting is set to Hide, only the
resources assigned to a group are displayed on the soft panel.
2. Status Window
The bottom right corner of each soft panel includes a status window. For each level in the list of available levels,
a corresponding status indicator display will indicate the current source for the currently selected destination.
The following buttons are located on the right-side of the soft panel interface:
› Individual Level Buttons — Click a level button to include the level in a crosspoint that you are configuring in
the matrix. A lit button indicates that the corresponding level will be included in the next transition. The color
and name of the button are specified using the Levels interface.
› CURRENT button — This button updates the level display area to show the current status for all displayed
levels.
› FOLLOW Button — Click this button to select all levels in the matrix. Clicking TAKE after clicking Follow
will then switch all crosspoints at the same time on all available levels.
› PENDING button — This button updates the level display area to show status for the currently pending
operation (if selected source has not been switched yet. e.g. before TAKE is pressed). The user may clear
individual source selections by selecting the levels to be cleared, then pressing CLEAR SRC SEL button.
› CLEAR Button — Click this button to clear all selections on the interface.

126 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 › USER button — This button shows current lock/protect status of each levels (and the soft panel name that is
currently owned it). Since the soft panel does not recognize the names of remote control panels (RCP) to
retrieve their name, a “owner #” name is used.

Figure 13.5 Status Protected — Destination Figure 13.6 Status Protected — User

3. TAKE Control Area

The bottom toolbar of the soft panel interface includes the following buttons:
› PROTECT Button — Click this button to prevent switching of the selected destination except by the panel that
initiated the protect. If you are using a soft panel with the Protection Operation set to Disable, the Protect
button is not displayed.
› LOCK Button — Click this button to prevent switching of the selected destination by an control device. If you
are using a soft panel with the Protection Operation set to Disable, the Lock button is not displayed.
› VIEW Button — Click this button to display the VIEW dialog. This dialog lists the current TAKE commands
in the queue. Individual items may be removed from the queue via the options in the VIEW dialog.
› CLEAR Button — Click this button to clear the current TAKE queue.
› PRESET Button — This button is used to queue up multiple TAKE commands. Select a destination/source
combination, then click PRESET. Select another destination/source combination then click PRESET. A
following TAKE command will execute all the PRESET switches. To view the switch commands queued by
the PRESET, click VIEW.
› TAKE Button — Click this button to execute the switch between the selected crosspoints. If you are using a
soft panel with the Take Operation set to Direct, a TAKE button is not displayed because the transitions will
occur automatically after a crosspoint switch is selected.

Crosspoint Switches via a Category Panel

The buttons and options in a Category soft panel are dependent on the categories defined for the current database,
and how the soft panel was defined in the Panels tab. Instead of having access to all sources, destinations, and
levels at one time, a Category soft panel provides access based on the categories and the tags you have created.
To make a crosspoint switch using a Group Category Panel
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore.
2. Double-click the node for the Category Panel.
The Category Panel tab opens.
3. From the status window, highlight the level(s) you wish to include in the crosspoint switch.
• Selected levels highlight in the level defined color.
• Non-selected levels are indicated by a gray button with white text.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 127

 4. To select a destination:
a. Click DEST from the category navigation tools.
b. Navigate to the desired group using the displayed groups in the main group window.
 Only groups containing destination assignments will be displayed unless the Non-group Resources option for
this soft panel is set to Show.
c. Select a DEST button from the available category destinations located in the main group window.
The status title bar (if enabled) reports the currently selected destination. In the example below, the user has
selected Level A1 and destination EDIT 3 from the EDIT group.

5. To select a source:
a. Click SRC from the category navigation tools.
b. Select a SRC button from the Source bus located in the middle of the interface.
 If your Category soft panel was created with the Take Operation set to Confirm, the TAKE button is lit.
Otherwise the crosspoint switch automatically occurs.

6. Click TAKE.

128 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Using Push Button Panels
 This soft panel type is not suitable for use on an Ultritouch hard panel. To control the Ultricore via an Ultritouch,
you must create and load an Ultritouch PB soft panel as outlined in the Ultritouch + Ultricore User Guide.

Panel Interface Overview

The Push Button soft panel is organized into three distinct windows. The order and width of each window can be
customized using the options in the Panels > Home View interface.
Figure 13.7 is an example of a Push Button soft panel set to portrait.

Figure 13.7 Example of the Default Push Button Soft Panel — Portrait

Figure 13.8 is an example of a Push Button soft panel set to landscape.

Figure 13.8 Example of the Default Push Button Soft Panel — Landscape

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 129

 1. Destinations Area
The Destinations area displays the available destinations for router control. Select a Destination button to arm
that destination for subsequent panel operations. Beneath each destination button is displayed the current source
for that destination.
This area also includes the Filter field. A filter is available to match destination names against the entered text:
• Enter text in the Filter field.
• Click (or press Enter). The destinations area updates to display only those destinations starting with
the filter text.
• To clear the active filter, click .
2. Sources Area
The Sources area displays the available sources for router control. Select a Source button to control the
crosspoint for the currently selected destination.
This area also includes a Filter field. A filter is available to match source names against the entered text:
• Enter text in the field provided
• Click (or press Enter). The sources area updates to display only those sources starting with the filter
text.
• To clear the active filter, click .
3. Current Destination
The currently selected destination label is displayed here. All subsequent panel operations operate on this
destination until a new destination is selected.

› — the current status is not the same for all levels (ie a breakaway switch has occurred).

› — the current destination is locked. No switches can be made on this destination.

› — the current destination is protected. Only the panel that initiated the protect may switch this
destination.
4. Levels Area
The Levels area displays the available router levels as individual buttons. The current source for a given router
level is displayed each level button. Select a Level button to include this level in the next source selection
operation. Select the button again to toggle the level selection setting.
› FOLLOW Button — toggles the selection for all displayed levels.
› CLEAR Button — toggles the currently active level buttons.
5. Operation Area
This area provides buttons for soft panel and router control.
› PROTECT Button — protect the current destination. The following occurs:
• The destination button displays a blue border.
• The Current Destination area displays . When a destination is protected, only the panel that initiated
the protect can change the destination status.
• The PROTECT button is now labeled as UNPROTECT. Toggle the button to disable the protect.
 Only the panel that initiated the protect may change the protect status.

130 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 › LOCK Button — locks the current destination. The following occurs:
• The destination button displays a red border.
• The current destination display area displays . When a destination is locked, no panel may change the
destination status.
• The LOCK button is now labeled as UNLOCK.
 Only the panel that initiated the lock may change the lock status.
› VIEW Button — displays the current crosspoint switch requests currently in the preset list. Individual
crosspoints may be removed via the list view.
› CLEAR Button — clear the preset list of all crosspoint selections.
› PRESET Button — adds the current destination/source/level selection to a preset list. A crosspoint is added to
the list for every level selected. This enables the user to add more switches and execute them all with a single
take operation. The preset function is only available when the Take Mode is set to Confirm.
› SALVO Button — reveals a list of predefined salvos. A salvo may be executed from the dialog. The salvo
button is visible only when the panel configuration has one or more salvos assigned.
› TAKE Button — is lit when the current destination/source selection is ready to be requested of the router. The
Take operation is a configurable option and will only be activated if the soft panel Take Mode is set to
Confirm.

Configuring a Push Button Soft Panel

The Push Button soft panel provides additional configuration options in addition to those outlined in the procedure
“Creating a Soft Panel” on page 108.
To configure a Push Button soft panel
1. Create a new soft panel as outlined in the procedure “To create a soft panel” on page 108.
2. Select the Home View tab.

3. Use the Display Icons menu to specify whether buttons will display the default icons based on window type
(Enable) or will only display the label text as determined by the database (Disable).
4. Use the Orientation menu to specify the layout on the monitor. Choose from the following:
• Portrait — orients the soft panel in a horizontal layout, where the soft panel is taller than it is wide.
• Landscape — orients the soft panel in a vertical layout, where the soft panel is wider than it is tall.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 131

 5. Specify the order that the windows will display in the completed soft panel layout as follows:
 By default, the windows are organized in the following order (left to right): Destinations, Sources, and Status.
a. In the Home Windows table, select the row for the window you want to move to a different position on the
soft panel layout.
b. Use the buttons in the toolbar to move the row to the desired position.
In the example below, the user moved the Status window to the top of the table so it will display on the far
left of the soft panel.

6. Adjust a window size as follows:

• Use the Percent field to specify the size of the window as a percentage of the total soft panel area.
• Use the Rows field to specify the number of button rows the window will display.
• Use the Columns field to specify the number of button columns the window will display
7. Click Apply to save your changes.

Crosspoint Switches via a Push Button Panel

The buttons and options in a Push Button soft panel are dependent on the current database, and how the soft panel
was defined in the Panels tab. You can also use the Filter fields in the Destinations and Sources area of the panel to
provides access based on the search criteria entered into each Filter field.
To make a crosspoint switch on a single level using the Push Button Panel
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore.
2. Double-click the node for the Push Button Panel.
The Push Button Panel tab opens.
3. Select the Level you want to perform the crosspoint switch.
4. Select a DEST button from the Destinations window.
The Status field reports the selected DEST button. In the example below, the user selected Level 6 and Dest 54.

132 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 5. Select a SRC button from the Sources window.
 If your soft panel was created with the Take Operation set to Confirm, the TAKE button is lit. Otherwise the
crosspoint switch automatically occurs.

6. Click TAKE.
To make a crosspoint switch on multiple levels using the Push Button Panel
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore.
2. Double-click the node for a Push Button Panel.
The Push Button Panel tab opens.
3. Select each level from the Levels window or click Follow to include all levels.
The Level buttons are lit in the toolbar.
4. Select a DEST button from the Destination window.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 133

 The Status area updates to display report the selected DEST button. In the example below, the user selected
Levels 2, 6, 8 and 11, then Dest 40.

5. Select a SRC button from the Source window.

The Status area updates to display only the selected SRC button. In the example below, Src 6 is selected.
 If your soft panel was created with the Take Operation set to Confirm, the TAKE button is lit. Otherwise the
crosspoint switch automatically occurs.

6. Click TAKE.

Using an Ultritouch PB Panel

An Ultritouch PB soft panel is organized into a pre-sized layout that can be loaded for use on an Ultritouch hard
panel. Customize each soft panel by specifying the size of each window, the location of each window on the layout,
and what operational buttons to include on the panel.
 The Ultritouch PB soft panel can only be loaded and used on an Ultritouch hard panel.

134 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Figure 13.9 Example of an Ultritouch PB Soft Panel

For More Information on...

• configuring and using an Ultritouch PB soft panel, refer to the Ultritouch + Ultrix User Guide.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Soft Panels in DashBoard • 135

136 • Soft Panels in DashBoard Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Using Salvos
Salvos are a selected series of crosspoints to switch in the matrix that can be saved and later recalled for use.

Creating Salvos
The Salvos tab enables you to create, delete, re-name, and manage your salvos in an interface that is off-line. The
Salvo tab layout is similar to the Matrix Panel layout where crosspoints are arranged in a grid layout with sources in
columns and the destinations in rows.
To create a salvo
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Database node for the Ultricore.
2. Double-click the Salvos node.
The Salvos tab opens.

3. Create a new salvo in the database as follows:

a. Click Edit > Add.
The Add Salvo dialog opens.
b. Type a unique identifier in the Name field for the new salvo.
c. Click Apply.
The Add Salvo dialog closes and the Salvos list updates with the new salvo selected.
4. Select the Level(s) button for the level(s) to include in the salvo.
The Level(s) buttons are lit.
5. To create a single crosspoint switch, use the cross-hairs to select the source/destination combination on the
grid.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Salvos • 137

 6. To assign multiple destinations to the same source.
a. Click the button(s) in the Destination toolbar for each destination to include in the switch; or click Select
All to include all the available Destinations.

b. Click the button in the Source toolbar for the source to use for the switch.
The grid updates to indicate the new selections. Notice that each level is represented by a corresponding slice
of the crosspoint indicator. In the case below, there are seven crosspoint switches selected that will affect two
levels.

7. Select the Follow button to enable the levels to automatically follow the switches.
 Click Advanced > Clear Dest Presets to cancel the destination selections or click Advanced > Clear All
Presets to clear the workspace.

8. Click Apply.
The salvo settings are updated.

138 • Using Salvos Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Saving the Current Crosspoint Status as a New Salvo
The Advanced menu in the Salvos tab provides the option to capture the current state of the crosspoint selections
and save them as a salvo.
To create a salvo based on the current destination status

 This procedure captures the status of all destinations.

1. Verify the current crosspoint state using one of the soft panels in your database. Refer to the chapter “Soft
Panels in DashBoard” on page 107.

2. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Database node for the Ultricore router.
3. Double-click the Salvos node.
The Salvos tab opens.

4. Create a new salvo in the database as follows:

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Salvos • 139

 a. Click Edit > Add.
The Add Salvo dialog opens.
b. Type a unique identifier in the Name field for the new salvo.
c. Click Apply.
The Add Salvo dialog closes and the Salvos list updates with the new salvo selected.
5. Click Advanced > Capture System Status.
The matrix in the Salvos tab updates to reflect the current crosspoint state as verified in step 1.

6. Click Apply.
To create a salvo based on selected destinations

 This procedure captures the status of selected destinations.

1. Verify the current destination crosspoint states using one of the soft panels in your database. Refer to the
chapter “Soft Panels in DashBoard” on page 107.
2. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Database node for the Ultricore router.
3. Double-click the Salvos node.
The Salvos tab opens.
4. Create a new salvo in the database as follows:
a. Click Edit > Add.
The Add Salvo dialog opens.
b. Type a unique identifier in the Name field for the new salvo.
c. Click Apply.
The Add Salvo dialog closes and the Salvos list updates with the new salvo selected.
5. Click Advanced > Capture Dest Status.
The matrix in the Salvos tab updates to reflect the current Destination states as verified in step 1.
6. Select the Level(s) button for the level(s) to include in the salvo.
The Level(s) buttons are lit.

140 • Using Salvos Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 7. Select the source(s) to use in the crosspoint switch.
8. Click Apply to update the salvo settings.

Copying and Pasting a Salvo

You can create a copy of a saved salvo and edit its settings or add crosspoint selections separately from the original
salvo.
To copy and paste a salvo
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Database node for the Ultricore router.
2. Double-click the Salvos node.
The Salvos tab opens.
3. Select the salvo to copy from the Salvos list.
4. Click Edit > Copy.
5. Click Edit > Paste.
A new salvo displays at the bottom of the Salvos list in the Salvos tab. By default, the salvo is named Salvo #
where # is an automatically assigned value.
6. Give the new salvo a unique identifier as outlined in the procedure “To re-name a salvo” on page 141.
7. Edit the settings of the new salvo as outlined in the procedure “To edit a salvo” on page 141.

Editing a Salvo
Once a salvo is created in the database, you can edit its crosspoint selections,
To edit a salvo
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Database node for the Ultricore router.
2. Double-click the Salvos node.
The Salvos tab opens.
3. Select the salvo from the Salvos list.
The grid updates to display the crosspoint selections currently saved for the salvo.
4. Perform steps 4 to 7 as outlined in the procedure “To create a salvo” on page 137.
5. Click Apply to save your changes.
To re-name a salvo
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Database node for the Ultricore router.
2. Double-click the Salvos node.
The Salvos tab opens.
3. Select the salvo from the Salvos list.
The grid updates to display the crosspoint selections saved for the salvo.
4. Click Edit > Rename.
The Rename Salvo dialog opens.
5. Type a new name for the salvo in the Name field.
6. Click Apply.
The Rename Salvo dialog closes and the salvo displays with the new name in the Salvos list.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Salvos • 141

 Deleting a Salvo
Deleting a salvo removes it from the database. The corresponding button on any soft panels for the deleted salvo are
also no longer displayed.
To delete a salvo from the database
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Database node for the Ultricore router.
2. Double-click the Salvos node.
The Salvos tab opens.
3. From the Salvos list, select the salvo to delete.
4. Click Edit > Delete.
5. Click Apply to close the dialog.
The salvo no longer displays in the Salvos list to the left of the workspace. If the salvo was assigned to a button
in a soft panel, the button is automatically deleted from the panel.

Recalling a Salvo
Once you have saved a salvo, you can recall it for use on a soft panel in DashBoard.
 You cannot recall salvos from a Category soft panel.
For More Information on...
• adding salvos to customized soft panels, refer to the section “Creating a Soft Panel” on page 108.
To recall a salvo from a Matrix panel
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore router.
2. Double-click the node for a Matrix Panel.
The Matrix Panel tab opens.
3. Click Salvo.
4. Click Recall.
The Execute Salvo dialog opens. Notice that the Active column reports whether the salvo is currently in use
(ON) or not (OFF).

5. Select the salvo to recall.

6. Click Apply to close the dialog.
7. Click Take to apply the salvo.

142 • Using Salvos Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 To recall a salvo from a MultiBus panel
1. In the Basic Tree View, expand the Soft Panels node for the Ultricore router.
2. Double-click a MultiBus Panel node.
The MultiBus Panel tab opens. The salvo buttons are located at the bottom of the soft panel interface. If a
salvo button is lit green, it is currently in use.

3. Click the button for the salvo you wish to recall.

The salvo button and Take buttons are now lit on the soft panel.

4. Click Take to apply the salvo.

The crosspoint switch is made, and the salvo button is no longer lit.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Using Salvos • 143

144 • Using Salvos Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Operation with Ross Devices
The Ultricore Central Controller connects to Ross NK series routers and Remote Control Panels (RCPs). Ross NK
series routers and RCP series devices may connect directly to the T-Bus port on the Ultricore, or via an
NK-IPS/NK-NET over Ethernet. The Ross RCP-ME and RCP-QE panels communicate with Ultricore via Ethernet.
 It is recommended for optimum performance to minimize device connections to the NK-NET.
For More Information on...
• defining connection points between Ultricore and external devices, refer to the chapter “Device Communication
Setup” on page 51.

Overview
Introducing an Ultricore to an existing Ross NK system requires specific configuration to enable the Ultricore to
manage the devices in the routing system.
 Ultricore does not support Unicode characters.

Using RCP-NK Series Remote Control Panels

When adding the Ultricore router to an existing system with one or more RCP-NK devices, each remote control
must:
• have the Virtual routing enabled on their Configuration page
• have the Comms Retry Delay Factor set to 80ms or greater
• ensure that the level numbers correspond to the Ultricore Level ID number
Be aware that the RCP-NK devices do not:
• support Ultricore salvos
• automatically get source and destination labels from the Ultricore. They must be entered manually or via a global
labels file.

Using an Ross NK Series Router

The Ross NK router partitioning not supported. The logical mapping of the Ultricore control system is far more
capable and should be implemented there if required.
Keep the following in mind:
• The NK-IPS requires version 2.23 or greater to communicate with an Ultricore.
• The SCP/A is not supported.
• The SCP/K2 is not supported.
• NK-A64 control level is not supported.
Table 15.1 outlines the nomenclature that Ultricore automatically uses for Ross NK devices.

Table 15.1 Default Ultricore Naming for Ross NK Devices

Ross NK Device Matrix Name Port Name
NK-3Gxxx deviceName.SDI deviceName.slot1.in/out[socket number].SDI.ch1
NK-Axxx deviceName.An Aud L deviceName.slot1.in/out[socket number].An Aud L.ch1
deviceName.An Aud R deviceName.slot1.in/out[socket number].An Aud R.ch1
NK-Dxxx deviceName.AES deviceName.slot1.in/out[socket number].AES.ch1

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Operation with Ross Devices • 145

 Table 15.1 Default Ultricore Naming for Ross NK Devices
Ross NK Device Matrix Name Port Name
NK-Mxx deciceName.Machine Control deviceName.slot1.in/out[socket number].Machine Control.ch1
NK-MDxxx deviceName.SDI deviceName.slot1.in/out[socket number].SDI.ch1
NK-Vxxx deviceName.An Vid deviceName.slot1.in/out[socket number].An Vid.ch1

Using Ross Analog Audio Devices (NK-A16, NK-A32, NK-A64)

The Ross NK Analog Audio devices (NK-A16, NK-A32, NK-A64) will present as two matrices: Left and Right
respectively.

Connection Diagrams
Figure 15.1 provides an example of a routing system with an Ultricore Central Controller, an NK-IPS, and several
Ross NK devices. Communication between the NK-IPS and the Ross NK devices is over T-Bus, while the Ultricore
communicates with the NK-IPS via Ethernet.
Ultricore
Central Controller
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

Network Switch

Internet / LAN / VPN

PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4 PORT 5 PORT 6 PORT 7 PORT 8

PC running DashBoard
NK-IPS
Network Bridge

Service
POWER T-BUS Port
ETHERNET

NK-MD32
Machine Control / Data Router

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
POWER

RCP-NKM
Remote Control Panel
PSU
T-BUS

RCP-NKQ
Remote Control Panel
PSU
T-BUS

NK-A64
32x32 Stereo Analog Audio Router
T-BUS
29-32 25-28 29-32 25-28

21-24 AUDIO 17-20 21-24 AUDIO 17-20

INPUTS OUTPUTS
13-16 9-12 13-16 9-12

5-8 1-4 T-BUS VID REF 5-8 1-4

Figure 15.1 Connection Example with an NK-IPS

Figure 15.2 provides an example of an Ultricore Central Controller, Ultrix router, NK-NET and various NK
devices.
 The NK-NET requires phantom power from the T-Bus to operate. This is available from any Ross NK series
router.

146 • Operation with Ross Devices Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 RCP-ME
Remote Control Panel
ETHERNET
PSU

ULTRIX-FR1
32x32 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
ENET 1 ! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT IN
Ultrix-HDBNC-IO
REF AUX A AUX B
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 4 A B
OUT IN

ENET 2 AUX A AUX B

Network Switch

Internet / LAN / VPN

PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4 PORT 5 PORT 6 PORT 7 PORT 8

PC running
r DashBoard

Ultricore
Central Controller
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

NK-3G64
64X64 3G/HD/SD SDI Router

T-BUS VIDREF
NK-NET
T-BUS to Ethernet Adapter

ETHERNET
NK-NET

TBUS

RCP-NKM
Remote Control Panel
PSU
T-BUS
NK-NET
T-BUS to Ethernet Adapter

ETHERNET

NK-3G-16
16x16 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
NK-NET

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
TBUS

T-BUS VID REF INPUTS OUTPUTS

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

NK-3G-16
16x16 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

T-BUS VID REF INPUTS OUTPUTS

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Figure 15.2 Connection Example with Two NK-NETs and an Ultrix Router

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Operation with Ross Devices • 147

 Ross RCP-NK Series Remote Control Panels
When adding the Ultricore to an existing system with one or more RCP-NK series devices, each panel must:
• have the Virtual Routing enabled on their Configuration page
• have the Comms Retry Delay Factor set to 80ms or greater
• ensure that the Level numbers correspond to the Ultricore Level ID number
Be aware that the RCP-NK series devices do not:
• support Ultricore salvos
• automatically receive source and destination labels from Ultricore. They must be entered manually or via a
global labels file.

Ross NK Series Routers

Ross NK Series routers can utilize two methods of connection to the Ultricore:
• Direct T-Bus connection
• Ethernet connection via an NK-IPS or NK-NET

All Ross NK routers are automatically discovered1 and appear in the available matrix list ready for label
assignment.

Integrating Ross NK Series Devices with Ultricore

Keep the following in mind when integrating Ross NK Series devices with Ultricore:
• Ross NK partitioning is not supported across different levels. Use Ultricore to facilitate this operation.
• NK-Ax analog audio routers present as two routers (Left and Right).
• NK-A64 control level is not supported.
• NK-SCP/A is not supported.
• NK-SCP/K2 is not supported.

Adding Ross NK Series Routers to the Ultricore Routing System

Add a Ross NK series device to the Ultricore routing system requires the following steps:
1. Determine the connection method to the Ross NK router. Choose from the following:
• Direct T-Bus
• Ethernet via NK-NET or NK-IPS
2. If you are using a Direct T-Bus connection, verify that the Ross NK series router is listed in the Connections
tab for the Ultricore. T-Bus devices are automatically discovered as T-Bus communication is always enabled on
the Ultricore.
3. If you are using an ethernet connection, define a connection point between Ultricore and each NK-IPS or
NK-NET. Refer to the section “Connecting to Ross Ethernet Devices” on page 54 for details.
4. Review the port label matrices for the Ultricore database.
5. Assign outputs to the logical destinations in the database as outlined in the section “To map a physical output
to a destination” on page 71.
6. Assign inputs to the logical sources in the database as outlined in the section “To map a physical input with a
source” on page 74.

1. Once an ethernet connection point has been established for ethernet connections.

148 • Operation with Ross Devices Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Integrating Ross RCP-ME/RCP-QE Panels with Ultricore
RCP-QE and RCP-ME ethernet series remote control panels connect to Ultricore via the facility network. The
panels offer some extra features not available to RCP-NK series control panels;
• automatic source and destination labeling
• automatic level and salvo labeling
• the ability to trigger system wide salvos
• Category index source/destination selection method (RCP-QE only)

Adding a Ross RCP-ME or RCP-QE Panel to the Ultricore Routing System

The Connection Editor interface for an RCP-ME or RCP-QE enables you to configure the connection point from
the panel to Ultricore. You will need DashBoard installed and running to access the Connection Editor interface.
To add an RCP-ME or RCP-QE
1. Connect the RCP to facility network and configure the network settings as outlined in the user guide for your
remote control panel.
2. Open the Connection Editor in DashBoard for your panel as follows:
a. In the Basic Tree View of DashBoard, expand the tree view for the remote control panel.
b. Double-click the Connection icon within the device tree.
The Connection Editor opens.
3. Locate the Servers to connect to area.

4. In a row of the provided table, type the IP Address of the Ultricore you want to establish a connection to.
Upon a successful connection and a refresh of the current DashBoard view (click the Refresh button), a check
mark displays next to the successful connection. In the above example, an IP Address is entered for Server 1.
5. Verify in the Connections area that a connection is establish.
6. Configure the Remote Control Panel layout as outlined in the user guide for your panel.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Operation with Ross Devices • 149

 Machine-Control (RS-422) Logical Mapping
Connecting an NK-M series router to Ultricore requires some special consideration.
Machine control routing requires two crosspoints for a point to point connection due to the bi-directional nature of
the signal. Each physical socket contains a transmit/receive pair. This can be thought of as a source-destination
combination and is known as a port.
It is necessary to configure the input and output of the machine control port on the same row ID on the logical
mapping tables.

Figure 15.3 Destination Mapping

Figure 15.4 Source Mapping

It does not matter where the machine control is mapped (either row 3 or 300), but the input and outputs physical
ports must be mapped to the same row ID.

Conditions for Machine Control

Three conditions must be met before machine control can be switched.
1. The NK machine control router is attached and configured within Ultricore (level, destination. and source
maps).
2. Selected breakaway or level must include the machine control level.
3. Machine control reciprocal must be enabled on the controller.

Configuring T-Bus Devices

Configuration of T-Bus devices connected to an Ultricore T-BUS port may be achieved by opening an IPS style
connection to the Ultricore Central Controller. This allows configuration and review of device settings in the same
manner as legacy system with an NK-IPS.

Adding an NK-IPS Connection to Ultricore

An NK-IPS connection must be manually added to DashBoard so the T-Bus devices may be configured.
To add an IPS connection to Ultricore
1. Note the TCP/IP Address of the Ultricore that you want to establish a connection to:
• In the Basic Tree View of DashBoard, hover your mouse cursor over the main Ultricore node; or
• In the Basic Tree View of DashBoard, right-click the main Ultricore node in the tree view and select View
Frame Information to display the Connection Information dialog.

150 • Operation with Ross Devices Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 2. Configure DashBoard to open an NK-IPS Connection to that TCP/IP address as follows:

a. In the Basic Tree View toolbar, click to display the Add New Connection dialog.

b. Select NK-IPS Connection.

The New TCP openGear Frame Connection dialog opens.

c. In the IP Address field, enter the IP Address of the Ultricore you noted in step 1.
d. Click Finish to apply your change and close the dialog.
3. Verify that a new node displays in the Basic Tree View. Note that the new node will have the same name as
your Ultricore device (where the default name is Ultricore).

4. Complete the device configuration by double-clicking the device under the IPS node in the tree view. Refer to
the user guide that accompanied your device for configuration details.

Operation with an Ultrix Router

Keep the following in mind when operating an Ultrix router within the Ultricore routing system:
• The Ultrix hardware is configured on the Ultrix router in DashBoard. Device specific functions such as hardware
setup, installed license keys, and Ultriscape setup remain in the DashBoard node of the Ultrix router.
• The Ultriscape (Multiviewer) licensed feature is configured on the Ultrix router in DashBoard.
• All crosspoint changes (including salvos) must originate from the master Ultricore database.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Operation with Ross Devices • 151

 • All routing commands are sent to and executed by the master Ultricore. This includes any third-party
communications (GVG, Probel, TS, etc.). The Ultrix router will ignore any routing commands not originating
from the master Ultricore database while in this connected mode.
• If more than one Ultrix router is to be controlled from the Ultricore, ensure that you assign unique device names
for the Ultrix routers via the front panel. This will help to quickly identify the routers within the Ultricore system.
Refer to the section “Connecting to an Ultrix Router” on page 51 for details.
• Each Ultrix router must be configured for remote control mode.
• All Remote Control Panels (RCP) must be configured to connect with the master Ultricore.
RCP-ME
Remote Control Panel
ETHERNET
PSU

ULTRIX-FR2
64x64 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT IN
Ultrix-HDBNC-IO
REF AUX A AUX B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT IN
Ultrix-HDBNC-IO
AUX A AUX B
ENET 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT IN
Ultrix-HDBNC-IO
REF AUX A AUX B
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 4 A B
OUT IN

ENET 2 AUX A AUX B

Network Switch

Internet / LAN / VPN

PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 PORT 4 PORT 5 PORT 6 PORT 7 PORT 8

PC running DashBoard

Ultricore
Central Controller
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

Figure 15.5 Example Setup Using an Ultricore and an Ultrix

152 • Operation with Ross Devices Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 System Integration Examples
There are many aspects of Ultricore that you can configure to suit the needs of your organization. The properties
that you are able to configure depends on your user permissions. Note that the information provided is for
illustration purposes only, and the requirements for your facility may differ from what is presented.

Adding Ultricore to Legacy Systems

In this example, you have legacy NK routers without remote control panels but you want to add the Ultricore as a
system controller.

Internet / LAN / VPN

PC running DashBoard

Ultricore
Central Controller
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

NK-3G-16
16x16 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

T-BUS VID REF INPUTS OUTPUTS

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

NK-V32-HQ
32x32 Analog Video Router
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

VID REF
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

VIDEO INPUTS VIDEO OUTPUTS

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

T-BUS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NK-A64
64x64 Stereo Analog Audio Router
61-64 57-60 61-64 57-60

53-56 49-52 53-56 49-52

45-48 41-44 45-48 41-44

37-40 AUDIO 33-36 T-BUS VID REF 37-40 AUDIO 33-36

INPUTS OUTPUTS
29-32 25-28 29-32 25-28

21-24 17-20 21-24 17-20

13-16 9-12 13-16 9-12

5-8 1-4 5-8 1-4

Figure 16.1 Routing System with Legacy Routers and No Remote Control Panels

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) System Integration Examples • 153

 You can use Ultricore and a series of NK-NETs to provide ethernet connectivity for T-Bus based legacy systems.

Internet / LAN / VPN

PC running DashBoard

Ultricore
Central Controller
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

NK-NET
T-BUS to Ethernet Adapter
ETHERNET
TBUS

NK-NET
NK-3G-16
16x16 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

T-BUS VID REF INPUTS OUTPUTS

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

NK-NET
T-BUS to Ethernet Adapter
ETHERNET
TBUS

NK-NET NK-V32-HQ
32x32 Analog Video Router
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

VID REF
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

VIDEO INPUTS VIDEO OUTPUTS

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

T-BUS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NK-NET
T-BUS to Ethernet Adapter
ETHERNET
TBUS

NK-NET NK-A64
64x64 Stereo Analog Audio Router
61-64 57-60 61-64 57-60

53-56 49-52 53-56 49-52

45-48 41-44 45-48 41-44

37-40 AUDIO 33-36 37-40 AUDIO 33-36

T-BUS VID REF
INPUTS OUTPUTS
29-32 25-28 29-32 25-28

21-24 17-20 21-24 17-20

13-16 9-12 13-16 9-12

5-8 1-4 5-8 1-4

Figure 16.2 Adding Ethernet Communications via an Ultricore

154 • System Integration Examples Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Integrating Third Party Routers with an Existing System
Ultricore integrates supported third-party routers using GVG protocol translation. In this configuration, the
Ultricore or the Ross router is the system master.

Internet / LAN / VPN

PC running DashBoard

Ultricore
Central Controller
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

RCP-ME
Remote Control Panel
ETHERNET
PSU

NK-NET
T-BUS to Ethernet Adapter
ETHERNET
TBUS

NK-NET

NK-3G-16
16x16 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

T-BUS VID REF INPUTS OUTPUTS

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Third-Party Router
Controlled via GVG Protocol

Figure 16.3 Integrating Third-Party Routers with an Ultricore

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) System Integration Examples • 155

 Integrating Routers with a Third Party Control System
Ultricore is integrated with an existing third-party routing system to add an NK router as a matrix within and under
control of the third-party system. In this case, the Ultricore acts primarily as a protocol translator.

Internet / LAN / VPN

PC running DashBoard

Ultricore
Central Controller
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

NK-NET
T-BUS to Ethernet Adapter
ETHERNET
TBUS

NK-NET

NK-3G-16
16x16 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

T-BUS VID REF INPUTS OUTPUTS

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Third-Party Control Panel

Controlled via GVG Protocol

Third-Party Router
Controlled via GVG Protocol

Figure 16.4 Using Ultricore to Integrate Existing Routers with a Third-Party Controller

156 • System Integration Examples Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Adding Third Party Control to Existing Systems
If you have an existing Ross routing system, you can add an external controller, such as an automation device, that
is compatible with a supported third-party protocol. In this example, the Ultricore acts as the system controller and
provides a protocol translation for the external third-party control device.
To add the third-party controller to your router system, connect the external controller to Ultricore and configure
Ultricore to translate between the third-party controller and the rest of your Ross routing system.
Third-Party Controller
Controlled via GVG Protocol

Internet / LAN / VPN

USB

USB
USB

USB

PORT 1
PC running DashBoard

Ultricore
Central Controller
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

NK-NET
T-BUS to Ethernet Adapter
ETHERNET
TBUS

NK-NET

NK-3G-16
16x16 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

T-BUS VID REF INPUTS OUTPUTS

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

RCP-ME
Remote Control Panel
ETHERNET
PSU

Figure 16.5 Adding Third-Party Control with an Ultricore

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) System Integration Examples • 157

 Monitoring of the Routing System and Communications
If you have an existing complex routing system with integration between the Ross products and third-party
equipment connected using a variety of communication protocols. This requires the monitoring and/or logging of
the communications streams to troubleshoot issues that could arise with system-level interactions.
In this case, the Ultricore acts as the system controller and provides system logging and monitoring functions
because it provides protocol translations and communications ports to enable communications between all the
devices in your system.

Internet / LAN / VPN

PC running DashBoard

Automation Device
Controlled via GVG Protocol

ULTRIX-FR2
64x64 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT IN
Ultrix-HDBNC-IO
REF AUX A AUX B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT IN
Ultrix-HDBNC-IO
AUX A AUX B
ENET 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT IN
Ultrix-HDBNC-IO
REF AUX A AUX B
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 4 A B
OUT IN

ENET 2 AUX A AUX B

USB

USB
USB

USB
Ultricore PORT 1

Central Controller
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

RCP-NKM
Remote Control Panel
PSU
T-BUS

NK-3G-16
16x16 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

T-BUS VID REF INPUTS OUTPUTS

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

RCP-ME
Remote Control Panel
ETHERNET
PSU

Third-Party Router
Controlled via GVG Protocol

Figure 16.6 Monitoring an Existing Routing System with an Ultricore

158 • System Integration Examples Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Replacing an NK-IPS
You are replacing legacy remote control panels but still T-Bus power and communication for one or more legacy
NK products. In this case, the Ultricore acts as the system controller, and provides power to T-Bus. The remote
control panels use virtual switch commands to control the router system.

Caution — Observe T-Bus power limitations. Ultricore has one loop through T-Bus port where
the NK-IPS has eight.

Internet / LAN / VPN

PC running DashBoard

Ultricore
Central Controller
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

RCP-NKM
Remote Control Panel
PSU
T-BUS

RCP-NKQ
Remote Control Panel
PSU
T-BUS

RCP-NKQ
Remote Control Panel
PSU
T-BUS

ULTRIX-FR2
64x64 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT IN
Ultrix-HDBNC-IO
REF AUX A AUX B
! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT IN
Ultrix-HDBNC-IO
AUX A AUX B
ENET 1 ! 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUT IN
Ultrix-HDBNC-IO
REF AUX A AUX B
REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 4 A B
OUT IN

ENET 2 AUX A AUX B

Figure 16.7 Replacing an NK-IPS with an Ultricore

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) System Integration Examples • 159

 Replacing an NK-3RD
If you have a system without an NK-IPS or an NK-3RD but you still require external control system that uses GVG
protocol. In this case, the Ultricore acts as the system controller and provides T-Bus connection to the NK routers.
The remote control panels/clients use virtual switch commands to control the routing system. Other attached clients
may use third-party protocols to control the routers. The Ultricore translates the third-party protocol to enable
control of the entire NK routing system.

Internet / LAN / VPN

PC running DashBoard

Ultricore
Central Controller
PSU 1 COM1
T-BUS
PORT 1 PORT 2
PSU 2 ALARM COM2
ETHERNET

RCP-NKM
Remote Control Panel
PSU
T-BUS

NK-3G-16
16x16 3G/HD/SD SDI Router
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

T-BUS VID REF INPUTS OUTPUTS

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Automation Device
Controlled via GVG Protocol
USB

USB
USB

USB

PORT 1

Figure 16.8 Replacing an NK-3RD with an Ultricore

160 • System Integration Examples Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 External Control
This chapter lists the third-party protocols the Ultricore supports.

Ultricore Control with Third-Party Systems

Ultricore may be controlled by third-party control or automation systems via the GVG Native Series 7000 or Probel
SW-P-08 protocols.

Ethernet Communication
The Ethernet interfaces to these protocols are automatically started with Ultricore and no further configuration is
necessary. However, you must configure your external control systems to match the settings outlined in Table 9.2.
For More Information on...
• defining an ethernet connection between Ultricore and an external device, refer to the section “Incoming
Ethernet Connections” on page 57.

Serial Communication
If you are using a serial connection, you must first define the serial connection point as outlined in the section
“Defining a Serial Connection” on page 59 and selecting GVG Native or Probel SW-P-08 from the Protocol menu
and the settings as outlined in Table 9.3.

Third-Party Matrix Control with Ultricore

The Ultricore control system is able to control third-party matrix devices. Two popular routing protocols are
available to enhance compatibility: GVG Series 7000 and Probel SW-P-08.
To configure third-party matrix control
1. Create an outgoing connection point from the Ultricore to the third-party matrix device.
2. Define the external matrix.
3. Mapping the external matrix inputs and outputs.
4. Define the Ultricore operating level.
5. Assign external matrix to the Ultricore source and destination levels.
The following sub-sections outline each step required to configure third-party matrix control.

Create an Outgoing Connection Point

You must define an interface for the system to access third-party matrix devices. The connection point must be
compatible with the settings of the external device you are trying to control.
Before proceeding, ensure that you have the following connection specifics:
• Communication protocol (GVG Native Series 7000 or Probel SW-P-08)
• Communication type (TCP/IP or serial1)
Refer to the section “Connecting to Third-Party Devices” on page 57 details.

1. Only available natively on the Ultricore Central Controller. Serial connections from Ultrix requires an
external USB-serial converter.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) External Control • 161

 Defining the External Matrix
The system does not automatically know the details of any connected third-party matrix. The user must manually
define the size and operating level within the Ultricore database.

Creating a Logical Matrix for an External Device

Once you establish a valid connection point between the Ultricore router and an external device, you can create
logical matrices in an Ultricore database using the device inputs and outputs. Creating a logical matrix from the
external device enables Ultricore to include the inputs and outputs for selection in the Sources and Destination tabs
of the Ultricore database.
 The input/output range and level you specify in the Ultricore database must match the settings within the external
matrix.
To create a logical matrix from an external device
1. Expand the Database node.
2. Double-click the Third Party Matrices node located under the Database node.
The Third Party Matrices tab opens.
3. Click Edit > Insert to display the Insert Matrix dialog.
4. In the Name field, type a unique identifier for the third-party matrix. This name is used to identify the matrix
within the Ultricore database.
5. Click Apply to close the Insert Matrix dialog and add a blank row to the Third Party Matrices table.
In the example below, a new matrix named “Matrix 2A” was added.

6. From the Device ID drop-down menu, select the device you want to define the logical matrix for. This is the
name given to the device when you established a connection point with it on the Connections tab.
 The Device ID menu lists only the third-party devices that have a valid connection point with the Ultricore
router.
7. Define the matrix size as follows:

162 • External Control Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 a. Use the First Output and Last Output fields to define the range of destinations from the device within the
Ultricore database.
b. Use the First Input and Last Input fields to define the range of sources from the device within the
Ultricore database.
 These created inputs and outputs will use the nomenclature DeviceID.Slot.Port.Type.Channel where DeviceID
represents the Name assigned to the external device on the Connections tab.
8. Use the Level field to specify the number of levels for the device within the Ultricore database.
9. Use the Type field to specify the signal type for the matrix.
10. Click Apply to save the new matrix to the database and add it to the list of available matrices in the Port
Labels tab.

Mapping the External Matrix Inputs and Outputs

Once the connection point and matrix are defined in the Ultricore database, you can map the external matrix inputs
and outputs in the same manner as we do with Ross device matrices. However, you will instead select an external
matrix output from the Outputs list (or an external matrix input from the Inputs list) in the database interfaces. The
available inputs and outputs will display in the format of DeviceID.slot#.in[x].Type.ch# or
DeviceID.slot#.out[x].Type.ch#.
 It may be necessary to create a new level in the Ultricore database for the assignment of inputs and outputs to
logical labels. Refer to the section “Defining the Levels in a Database” on page 116 for details.
For More Information on...
• assigning destinations, refer to the section “Defining the Destinations in a Database” on page 69.
• assigning sources, refer to the section “Defining the Sources in a Database” on page 73.

Using Index Numbers

Some protocols refer to source and destinations with a numerical index number. This number is listed in the ID
column of the Source and Destination tabs of the Ultricore database.
For example, the GVG protocol reference to destination ‘00h’ correlates to Ultricore destination ID 1 in the case
shown below for the Dest 1 entry in the table.

Figure 17.1 Example of ID Numbers Listed in a Destinations Tab

Protocol Options
Some protocols provide additional configuration options via the Protocol Options dialog. These options can be
accessed via the Protocol Servers table on the Database > Connections interface. Selecting an Options button to
on the table opens this dialog.
The Protocol Options are outlined with the respective protocol details in the following sections.

GVG Series 7000 Native Protocol Commands

Ultricore supports the GVG Series 7000 Native protocol and is available over an RS-422 or RS-232 serial
connection, as well as Ethernet connection.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) External Control • 163

 Table 17.1 Default GVG Native Connection Types
Setting
Serial
Connection Type RS422 or RS232
Baud 38400
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Ethernet
Port 12345a
a. Port 12345 is the default value but is user configurable.

Table 17.2 summarizes the settings in the Protocol Options dialog for the GVG Series 7000 Native protocol.
Table 17.2 Protocol Options — GVG Series 7000 Native
Option Setting Notes
L4 Echo Yes Send command acknowledgments on
protocol layer 4 (Ethernet only)
No Do not send acknowledgments. This is the
default.

Table 17.3 lists the GVG Native Protocol commands the Ultricore supports.

Table 17.3 GVG Native Protocol Commands

Message
Command Description Notes
BK[,parameter]
BK,D Force next QD command to return Clears the flags associated with the D,no_parameter
status of all destinations command. After BK,D is sent, the next QD,no_parameter
command will result in destination statuses or all destinations
being returned.

BK,E Request status of level 4 echo

setting

BK,E,ON Set level 4 echo to on An err=00 response will be returned for successful commands
that do not generate their own response (eg. Take commands).
This is a per session setting.

BK,E,OFF Set level 4 echo to off (default) No response will be given for commands that do not generate
their own response.

PR,dest_name,level_bitmap Protects a specific destination ER error-code response is currently not supported.

from having its source changed

QC[,dest_name] Query Combined Destination

status by name

QD[,dest_name] Query Destination status by name No information is returned for unmatched destination levels

Qd[,dest_name] Query Destination status by name Sets response src_name to NO_XPT for unmatched
destination levels

164 • External Control Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 17.3 GVG Native Protocol Commands
Message
Command Description Notes
QI,destIndex,lvlIndex Query Destination status by
indexa
Qi,destIndex,lvlIndex Query Destination status by The srcIndex returned will be 0xfffe if an error condition
indexa applies to the crosspoint being reported.

QJ[,destIndex] Query Destination status by No information is returned for unmatched destination levels
indexa
Qj Query Destination status by Sets response srcIndex to 0xFFFe for unmatched destination
indexa levels

QN,parameter
QN,S Query source names/labels

QN,D Query destination names/labels

QN,L Query level names/labels

QN,IS Query names via source indexa

QN,ID Query names via destination
a
index
QN,V Query salvo name

QT Query date and time

TA,dest_name,nbr_sources,src_name_ Takes sources (on specified Src_name_entryn = src_name,level_bitmap

entry1[,...src_name_entryn] levels) to specified destination, by
name rather than index

TD,dest_name,src_name_entry Takes same source to all or Src_name_entryn = src_name[,levelbitmap]

specified levels No levelbitmap=all destination levels

TI,destIndex,srcIndex[,levelIndex] Request take by index with level

indexa
TJ,destIndex,nbr_sources,srcIndex,lev Takes sources (on specified
el_bitmap[,...,srcIndex,level_bitmap] levels) to specified destinations by
index rather than name; allows
breakaways

TS,salvo_name Request Take Salvo

UP,dest_name,level_bitmap Removes Protect from specified ER, error-code response is currently not supported.
destination

a. Zero-based hex logical index numbering.

For More Information on...

• these commands, refer to the GVG protocol documentation.

RossTalk Commands
The RossTalk protocol is a plain text based protocol that allows control of Ross Video equipment.
 Each command should be terminated by a carriage return and a line feed (CR/LF).
To send RossTalk commands to Ultricore
1. Create a network connection to the Ultricore router on Port 7788.
2. At the prompt, enter the commands you wish to send. Refer to Table 17.4 for a list of supported commands.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) External Control • 165

 Table 17.4 RossTalk Protocol Commands
Message
Notes
Command Description
GPI ## Execute the salvo number For example, GPI 04 triggers the salvo <salvo_name>[4] as
corresponding to the numerical ## listed in the Ultricore database
extension of the command

TIMER ##:RUN Request Timer ID to start/resume

TIMER ##:STOP Request Timer ID to stop

TIMER ##:PAUSE Request Timer ID to pause

TIMER ##:END Request Timer ID to end

XPT D:<dest> S:<source> Crosspoint command for a router Range start value must be less than the end value
I:<user_id> [L:<levels>] TAKE where: Single levels and ranges can be mixed in the list (eg.
• <dest> is the logical destination ID L:1,3,4-8,12-17)
from the active database (1-based) There are no spaces between numbers or ranges
• <source> is the logical source ID Invalid numbers or improperly specified ranges will be
from the active database (1-based) ignored
• <user_id> is the numeric An argument is separated from its value using a single colon
user/panel ID that will be used to (:)
request the switch Command arguments are separated single spaces

• <levels> is an optional parameter The arguments may be specified in any order, (e.g. these are
equivalent: XPT D:1 S:4 I:2 and XPT S:4 I:2 D:1)
specifying comma-separated list of
1-based level IDs to switch (for Examples:
breakaway, e.g. L:1,2,4). If no • ID 7 requesting to switch Dest 2 to Source 1 on Levels 1,3,5
levels are specified, a follow and 12-16
switch (all valid levels) is • XPT I:7 D:2 S:1 L:1,3,5,12-16
requested.
• <levels> supports ranges specified
by two numbers separated by dash
(e.g. L:1-16)

Probel SW-P-08 Protocol Commands

Ultricore supports the Probel SW-P-08 protocol and is available over an RS-422 or RS-232 serial connection, as
well as ethernet connection. Table 17.5 provides the default values for this protocol.
Table 17.5 Default Probel SW-P-08 Connection Types
Setting
Serial
Connection Type RS422 or RS232
Baud 38400
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Ethernet
Port 8910a
a. Port 8910 is the default value but is user configurable.

166 • External Control Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

  When Ultricore is the controller, Probel SW-P-08 System 1 is implemented. When Ultricore is not the controller,
Probel SW-P-08 System 3 is implemented (where equipment functions exist).
Table 17.6 summarizes the settings in the Protocol Options dialog for the Probel SW-P-08 protocol.
Table 17.6 Protocol Options — Probel SW-P-08 protocol
Option Setting Notes
Protocol Variant Non-extended Use non-extended commands only
Extended Use extended commands only
Use Last Request Use command set as per last received
command format (e.g. if received a
non-extended command, reply in a
non-extended format). This is the default.
Matrix Mode Yes Swap matrix and level fields
No Do not swap matrix and level fields. This is
the default.
Unused Field # Send number (0-15) in either Level or
Matrix field - which ever is not used as per
Matrix Mode setting. The default is 0.

Table 17.7 lists the Probel SW-P-08 Serial Protocol commands the Ultricore supports.

Table 17.7 Probel SW-P-08 Native Protocol Commands

Request Message Response Message Notes
Cmd ID Description Cmd ID Description
01 Crosspoint Interrogate 03 Crosspoint Tally Get single crosspoint status

02 Crosspoint Connect 04 Crosspoint connected Take single crosspoint

10 Protect Interrogate 11 Protect Tally Get destination protect status

12 Protect Connect 13 Protect connected Set destination protect

14 Protect Disconnect 15 Protect dis-connected Turn off destination protect

17 Protect Device Name Request 18 Protect Device Name Response Get name of device that hold
protect

19 Protect Tally Dump Request 20 Protect Tally Dump Get all protect status

21 Crosspoint Tally Dump Request 22, 23 Crosspoint Tally Dump Get all crosspoint status
Cmd22: Byte max dest 191
Cmd23: Word max. dest.
65535

97 Implementation Request 98 Implementation Status Get list of commands

supported

100 All Source Names Request 106 Source Name Response Get all source names (8 char.
max.)

101 Single Source Name Request 106 Source Name Response Get single source names (8
char. max.)

102 All Destination Association Name 107 Destination Association Name Get destination names (8
Request Response char. max.)

103 Single Destination Association Names 107 Destination Association Name Get single destination name
Request Response (8 char. max.)

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) External Control • 167

 Table 17.7 Probel SW-P-08 Native Protocol Commands
Request Message Response Message Notes
Cmd ID Description Cmd ID Description
104 All UMD Labels Request 108 UMD Label Response Only one set of labels is
currently supported. UMD
Labels replicate source
labels. (16 char. max.)

105 Single UMD Labels Request 108 UMD Label Response Get single source label (16
char. max.)

120 Crosspoint Connect On Go Group 122 Crosspoint Connect On Go Group Add crosspoint to preset
Salvo Salvo Acknowledge group

121 Crosspoint Go Group Salvo 123 Crosspoint Go Done Group Salvo Switch/clear preset group
Acknowledge

124 Crosspoint Salvo Group Interrogate 125 Crosspoint Group Salvo Tally Preset group status

EXTENDED
129 Extended Crosspoint Interrogate 131 Extended Crosspoint Tally Get crosspoint status

130 Extended Crosspoint Connect 132 Extended Crosspoint Connected Take single crosspoint

138 Extended Protect Interrogate 139 Extended Protect Tally Get destination protect status

140 Extended Protect Connect 141 Extended Protect Connected Protect a destination

142 Extended Protect Disconnect 143 Extended Protect Disconnected Turn off protect for a
destination

147 Extended Protect Tally Dump 148 Extended Protect Tally Dump Message Get all protect status for
given level

149 Extended Crosspoint Tally Dump 151 Extended Crosspoint Tally Dump Word Get destination status for
Message given level

228 Extended All Source Names 234 Extended Source Name Response Get source names (8 char
max.)

229 Extended Single Source Name 234 Extended Source Name Response Get single source name (8
char max.)

230 Extended All Destination Association 235 Extended Destination Association Get all destination names (8
Names Names Response char. max.)

231 Extended Single Destination 235 Extended Destination Association Get single destination name
Association Name Names Response (8 char. max.)

232 Extended Single UMD Label Request 236 Extended UMD Labels Response Get all source labels (16 char.
max.)

233 Extended Single UMD Label Request 236 Extended UMD Labels Response Get single source label (16
char. max.)

248 Extended Crosspoint Connect On Go 250 Extended Crosspoint Connect On Go Preset group acknowledge
Group Salvo Group Salvo Acknowledge

124 Crosspoint Group Salvo Interrogate 253 Extended Crosspoint Group Salvo Tally Preset group status

NVISION Commands
Ultricore supports the NVISION NP16 Ethernet protocol.
 Ensure that the Ultrix router has the Ultricore-NVISION license installed. Refer to the Ultrix User Guide for
details.

168 • External Control Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 17.6 summarizes the settings in the Protocol Options dialog for the NVISION protocol.
Table 17.8 Protocol Options — NVISION protocol
Option Setting Notes
Offset 0 The Ultricore level matches the NVISION
level
1 The Ultricore level is the NVISION level
plus 1

NVISION NP16 Ethernet Protocol

Ultricore supports the NVISION NP16 Ethernet protocol. Table 17.9 outlines the default values for the Ultricore
when using NP16.

Table 17.9 Default Connection Types — NVISION NP16

Setting
TCP Port 5194

NP16 Commands
The NP16 protocol defines the message format: Protocol ID | Sequence Number | byte count | Command
Each field consists of a 32bit number where:
• Protocol ID — 0x0000000C (Router Control Protocol)
• Sequence number — controller generated and added to Ultricore response message
• byte count — total number of bytes in message including header (<8176)
• Command — refer to Table 17.10
 The protocol is zero based, meaning that destination 0 in the protocol relates to destination ID#1 in Ultrix. This is
true for sources, destinations, and level values.
Refer to Table 17.10 for a list of supported NP16 commands.

Table 17.10 NP16 Protocol Commands

Message
Notes
Command Description
0x0000 0050 Performs a TAKE

0x0000 0051 Set Output LPR Sets or releases a lock or protect on a

destination

0x0000 0052 Get Status of Outputs Retrieves the crosspoint status

0x0000 0059 Router Partition Information

0x0000 005E Crosspoint Tally Retrieves the crosspoint status

0x0000 0070 Machine Control Take Format 1 only

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) External Control • 169

 NVISION NP0010 Serial Protocol
Ultricore supports a limited sub-set of the NVISION serial NP0010 protocol.
Table 17.11 outlines the default values for the Ultricore for an NP0010 serial connection.

Table 17.11 Default Connection Types — NVISION NP0010

Setting
Connection Type RS232, RS422
Baud 9600, 19200, 38400, 56700, 115200
Data Bits 8
Parity No
Stop Bits 1

Refer to Table 17.12 for a list of supported NP0010 commands.

Table 17.12 NP0010 Protocol Commands

Message
Notes
Command Description
0x50 Take Non-timestamped version only

0x51 Destination status Get destination status

0x55 Lock destination Assert a destination lock

0x56 Protect destination Assert a destination protect

0x58 Release destination lock/protect Releases the destination lock and protect

0x66 Destination LPR state Get destination locked/protect/released status

TSL UMD Protocol v3.1 Commands

Table 17.13 outlines the default values for the Ultricore when using TSL UMD v3.1.
Table 17.13 Default Connection Types — TSL UMD v3.1
Setting
Serial
Connection Type RS422
Baud 38400
Data Bits 8
Parity Even
Stop Bits 1
Ethernet
TCP Port 5727
UDP Port 4490

170 • External Control Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Protocol Implementation
Ultricore implements the protocol with the following structure: DisplayID | Control | DisplayData.
Table 17.14 lists the TSL UMD Protocol v3.1 commands the Ultricore supports.

Table 17.14 TSL UMD Protocol v3.1 Commands

Protocol
Breakdown Description Ultriscape System Use
Display Address 0 - 126 display identification enumeration DisplayID associated with source or
destination
Control Byte

Bit 0 Tally 1 status (1=on, 0=off) Tally 1 (Red)a

Bit 1 Tally 2 status Tally 2 (Green)

Bit 2 Tally 3 status Not used

Bit 3 Tally 4 status Not used

Bits 4-5 Brightness value Not used

Bit 6 Reserved Not used

Bit 7 0 Not used

Display Data 16 ASCII display characters (20h-3Eh) UMD Display Text

a. Green/Red may be swapped by configuring the Global Tally Settings in the Ultriscape
Head interface for an Ultrix router. Refer to the Ultrix User Guide for details on these
settings.

TSL UMD Protocol v4.0 Commands

Table 17.15 outlines the default values for the Ultricore when using TSL UMD v4.0.

Table 17.15 Default Connection Types — TSL UMD v4.0

Setting
Serial
Connection Type RS422
Baud 38400
Data Bits 8
Parity Even
Stop Bits 1
Ethernet
TCP Port 5728
UDP Port 4491

Protocol Implementation
Ultricore implements the protocol with the following structure: Header | Control | DisplayData | VBC | XData.
Table 17.16 lists the TSL UMD Protocol v4.0 commands the Ultricore supports.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) External Control • 171

 Table 17.16 TSL UMD Protocol v4.0 Commands
Protocol
Breakdown Description Ultriscape System Use
Header 0x80 + 0 - 126 display address DisplayID associated with source or
destination
Control Byte

Bit 0 Tally 1 status (1=on, 0=off) Not used

Bit 1 Tally 2 status Not used

Bit 2 Tally 3 status Not used

Bit 3 Tally 4 status Not used

Bit 4-5 Brightness value Not used

Bit 6 0=display data, 1=command data Display data only (0)

Bit 7 0 Not used

Display Data 16 ASCII display characters (20h - 7Eh) UMD display text
VBC

Bits 3-0 Byte count of XData

Bits 6-4 Minor protocol version (v4.0=0)

Bit 7 0
XData1

Bits 0-1 Right Hand tally valuea Not implemented

Bits 2-3 Text display valuea Sets PiP label (UMD) text background color

Bits 4-5 Left hand tally valuea Displayed in either border or text
background; can be either or both

Bit 6 Reserved

Bit 7 0
XData2

Bits 0-1 Right Hand tally value Not implemented

Bits 2-3 Text display value Not implemented

Bits 4-5 Left hand tally value Not implemented

a. Where 0=off, 1=Red, 2=Green, 3=Amber

TSL UMD Protocol v5.0 Commands

Table 17.17 outlines the default values for the Ultricore when using TSL UMD v5.0.

Table 17.17 Default Connection Types — TSL UMD v5.0

Setting
Serial
Connection Type RS422
Baud 38400
Data Bits 8

172 • External Control Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 17.17 Default Connection Types — TSL UMD v5.0
Setting
Parity Even
Stop Bits 1
Ethernet
TCP Port 5729
UDP Port 4492

Table 17.18 summarizes the settings in the Protocol Options dialog for the TSL UMD v5.0 protocol.
Table 17.18 Protocol Options — TSL UMD v5.0 protocol
Option Setting Notes
Wrapping Yes Wrap commands for TCP mode
No Do not wrap commands (UPD mode). This
is the default.
PBC in Count Value Yes Include the Packet Byte Count field when
calculating the byte count value
No Do not include the Packet Byte Count field
in the byte count value. This is the default.

Protocol Implementation
Ultricore implements the protocol with the following structure: PBC | Ver. | Flags | Screen | DMSG (Index, Control,
Length, Text).
Table 17.19 lists the TSL UMD Protocol v5.0 commands the Ultricore supports.

Table 17.19 TSL UMD Protocol v5.0 Commands

Protocol
Breakdown Description Ultriscape System Use
PBC Total byte count of packet

Ver. Minor version number (0=v5.00)

Flags

Bit 0 0=ASCII strings, 1=UTF-16LE

Bit 1 0=display data, 1=screen control Display data only (0)

Bits 2-7 Reserved (0) Not used

Screen 16bit Screen ID ScreenID associated with source or

destination
DMSG

Index 16bit Display Address DisplayID associated with source or

destination

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) External Control • 173

 Table 17.19 TSL UMD Protocol v5.0 Commands
Protocol
Breakdown Description Ultriscape System Use
Control Minor protocol version (v5.0=0)
Bits 0-1 Right hand tally valuea Sets right-hand tally indicator color
(Ultriscape configuration dependent)

Bits 2-3 Text display valuea Sets text background and border color

Bits 4-5 Left hand tally valuea Sets left-hand tally indicator color

Bits 6-7 Brightness value (0-3) Not implemented

Bits 8-14 Reserved (0)

Bit 15 0=display data, 1=command data Display data only (0)

Length Byte count of text

Text Text as defined by Flag 0 setting UMD display text

a. Where 0=Off, 1=Red, 2=Green, 3=Amber

Probel SW-P-08 Serial Protocol Commands

Table 17.20 lists the Probel SW-P-08 Serial Protocol commands that Ultricore supports.

Table 17.20 Probel SW-P-08 Native Protocol Commands

Command Description Response Message Notes
01 Crosspoint Interrogate Crosspoint Tally

02 Crosspoint Connect

10 Protect Interrogate Protect Tally

12 Protect Connect

14 Protect Disconnect

19 Protect Tally Dump Request Protect tally Dump Response

21 Crosspoint Tally Dump Request Crosspoint Tally Dump (word) Response

97 Implementation Request Implementation Status

100 All Source Names Request Source Name Response

101 Single Source Name Request Source Name Response

102 All Destination Association Name Destination Association Name Response

Request

103 Single Destination Association Destination Association Name Response

Names Request

104 All UMD Labels Request UMD Label Response Only one set of labels is
currently supported. UMD
Labels replicate source
labels.

105 Single UMD Labels Request UMD Label Response

Enabling SNMP Support

Ultricores running software version 3v4 or higher provide optional support for remote monitoring and control of
your router using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). This protocol is compatible with many
third-party monitoring and control tools.

174 • External Control Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

  The MIB file provides SNMP traps for the configurable alarms on Ultricore as well as on the power supplies and
fans.

Enabling SNMP Support

The SNMP monitoring and control feature for your Ultricore is a software option that you enable in the System
Status > Network tab.
To enable SNMP support on the Ultricore
1. Verify that the SNMP license key is installed for the router. Refer to the section “Installing a License Key” on
page 32 for details.
2. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node under the Ultricore node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
3. Select the Network tab.
4. Locate the SNMP area of the tab.

5. Select the Enable SNMP box.

6. Ensure that the Alarms you want to monitor via SNMP are also enabled on the Ultricore router.
• “Monitoring the Hardware” on page 297
• “Monitoring the Communications” on page 317
• “Monitoring the Signals” on page 321

Configuring the SNMP Agent using DashBoard

The SNMP Agent on the Ultricore uses SNMP version 2 to allow queries of the configured system alarms, and state
changes to configured alarms will be sent out as SNMP traps to the specified Trap Destination IP Address(es).
 Whenever the options in the SNMP area are edited, the SNMP Agent is restarted. It can take up to 10 seconds for
all monitored states to be updated. This latency only applies once on startup.
To configure the SNMP Agent using DashBoard
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node under the Ultricore node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Network tab.
3. Locate the SNMP area of the tab.
4. Use the SNMP Community Name field to specify the SNMP password for GET requests. For example,
public.

5. Use the SNMP Trap Destination IP Address field to specify the target address to which traps should be sent.
An example of a valid target is provided in the SNMP area.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) External Control • 175

  A maximum number of six strings are displayed in the SNMP Trap Destination IP Address field at one time. If
at the maximum number, you must select a string from the field and delete it before adding a new target entry.
6. Press [Enter] to apply the changes.

Ember+ Registration and Discovery

This section provides information on the setup and operation for the Ultricore to communicate with a third-party
control system via the Ember+ media distribution protocol.

Establishing a Connection
To establish a connection between the Ember+ client and the Ultricore
1. Configure your network streams as outlined in the Ultrix User Guide.
2. Configure your router database as outlined in “Database Configuration” on page 63.
3. Install the Ultricore-EMBER+ license on the Ultricore. Refer to “Software License Keys” on page 39. This
enables the Ultricore to start an Ember+ server and listen to incoming connections.
4. Add the Ultricore in the Ember+ control system interface using the IP Address assigned to the Ultricore.
5. In the Ember+ controls system, set the TCP port to 9000 for the Ultricore.

Specifying the Operation Mode

Ultricore can be controlled via Ember+ in two modes: Virtual Mode (table mapped IO) or Physical Mode (direct
socket control).
To specify the Ember+ operation mode on the Ultricore
1. Display the Connections tab for Ultrix as follows:
a. Expand the Database node in the Tree View.
b. Double-click the Connections node.
2. Click Options in the Protocol Servers area.
The Server Options dialog opens.

3. Use the Ember Plus menu to specify the operation mode required by your Ember+ control system. Choose
from the following:
• Virtual Mode — each level is represented by a Matrix and the Labels will be the one defined in the
Destinations and Sources tabs.

176 • External Control Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 • Physical Mode — the whole router is represented as a single Matrix and the physical socket labels are used.
The external control system using Ember+ commands bypasses the virtual IO mapping and directly controls
the Ultrix physical socket connections. Therefore the Ultrix should not be switched by any other devices.
4. Click Apply to close the dialog.
5. Click Apply at the bottom of the Connections tab to apply the new setting.

Supported Commands
We support the Get Directory and Connect commands. The router is represented using the Ember+ Matrix
object including Labels. This allows the Ember+ control system to see the number of levels, number of sources and
destinations and their labels, the per destination status, and issue switch commands.
 If you make changes to the router database (such as Levels, Destinations and Sources) after establishing
communications, you may need to refresh/reload/reconnect the connection.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) External Control • 177

178 • External Control Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Monitoring
The status of the Ultricore may be monitored via its fields in the DashBoard client software or the LEDs located on
the front panel of the chassis.

Enabling Logging for the Ultricore

The Ultricore records events in non-volatile memory. Each event includes a timestamp, and information about the
event. The following events and conditions are recorded in the logs:
• Configuration changes that affect the routing path.
• Input state changes such as video presence, audio presence, video formats. In the case of audio inputs, the log
entry also includes the associated audio cluster.
• Power-on or reboot cycles.
• Error conditions reported by DashBoard.
 You can also monitor the overall routing system status via the System Status tabs in DashBoard. Refer to the
section “Status Tabs” on page 186 for details on these tabs.
To enable the Ultricore to log events
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Select the Logging box.

Monitoring the Network Status

The Ethernet ports on the Ultricore rear panel are used to connect to an ethernet network for communications.
To verify the ethernet redundancy status via the System Status interface
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Network tab.
3. Refer to Table 19.3 on page 187 for a summary of the possible messages displayed in the Network tab.

Forcing an Ethernet Failover Switch

The failover feature enables the Ultricore to use the second Ethernet port when the primary Ethernet connection is
lost or unavailable. The Active ENET field in the System Status > Network tab reports when Ultricore switches
from one Ethernet port to the other.
To force an ethernet failover switch
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, double-click the System Status node.
The System Interfaces display in the DashBoard window.
2. Select the Network tab.
3. Click ENET Failover Force.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Monitoring • 179

 Monitoring the Ultricore Mode Status
The primary Ultricore passes all commands to each client device in the system. Each client device responds back to
the primary in minute intervals.

Primary Status
If the Ultricore is configured as a primary, the Ultricore Clients table in the Communication Settings interface
reports on the status between it and each client device connected to it. Each client is listed in the table, with the most
recently connected device displayed at the bottom of the list.

Figure 18.1 Ultricore Mode — Primary Status

Client Status
If the Ultricore router is configured as a client, the Communication Settings interface reports on the
communications between it and the primary.

Troubleshooting
If you have lost communication between the primary Ultricore and its clients:
1. Verify that each device is installed correctly.
2. Verify that each devoce is installed with a network connection to your facility.
3. Verify the Ethernet settings for each device are valid.
4. Verify that the primary Ultricore reports a list of valid connections to clients in its Ultricore Clients table.
5. Verify that each client Ultricore is running software compatible to the primary Ultricore.

Using the System Logs in DashBoard

An entry in each log includes a timestamp, a code number, and a description. Messages are written to the log when
significant changes occur in the operation of the Ultricore. These could include: changes to video, reference, audio
or time inputs; power-on or reboot cycles; configuration changes that can have an effect on the routing path; alarm
conditions.
To access the system logs in DashBoard
1. Double-click the System Logs node located under the Database node.
The System Logs tab opens.
2. To view the communication log for the Ultricore only, select the Routing System Log option.
3. To view the log for communications between the Ultricore and other devices, select the Controller Device Log
option.
4. To view the log for executed tasks in DashBoard for the Ultricore, select the DashBoard Communications
Log option.
5. Click Refresh to update the entries for the currently selected log.

180 • Monitoring Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Saving the Current Settings for the Ultricore
You can save the Ultricore settings to a configuration file that can be used by Ross Technical Support for
troubleshooting. Use this procedure only under the guidance of Ross Technical Support.
To save your setup a new file
1. In the Tree View of DashBoard, right-click the node for the Ultricore that you want to save the settings for.
2. Select Save Configuration to File.
The Save Configuration to File dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the folder on your DashBoard computer in which you want to save the configuration file.
 The default location is Desktop\My Documents.
4. Click Save.

Monitoring the Devices in a Routing System

Devices with an established and valid communication point with Ultricore are displayed under the Devices node in
the Tree View. Ultricore aggregates all the devices in a system under the Devices node to provide system wide
monitoring capabilities.
 If you cannot expand a Devices sub-node, there are currently no devices of that type communicating with the
Ultricore.
To view the external devices communicating with an Ultricore
1. Expand the Devices node.
2. Expand the Controllers + Matrices sub-node to display a list of routers communicating with Ultricore.
All routers and matrix devices communicating with Ultricore are listed under the Controllers and Matrices
sub-node.

3. Expand the Panels sub-node to display a list of remote control panels communicating with Ultricore.
All remote control devices communicating with Ultricore are listed under the Panels sub-node.

4. Double-click the node for the device you want to verify.

The interface for the device displays in the DashBoard window. In the example below, the interface for an
Ultrix Router is displayed in the DashBoard window.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Monitoring • 181

 Monitoring via the Front Panel
The LCD Display on the Ultricore front panel reports the IP Address of the Ultricore and reports when an error or
warning condition is occurring on the Ultricore panel.

Navigating the Menus

The front panel includes a five-direction round finger joystick that is used to navigate the Ultricore messages on the
LCD Display.

Up

Back Forward

Down
Figure 18.2 Positioner Movement

Use the following actions to navigate the parameters:

• In — pressing once brings the menu system onto the monitor output; holding for two seconds exits the menu
system. This position is also used to enter the menu values/parameters.
• Up — pressing once selects the menu, item, or value above the current selection; holding scrolls to the top of the
available selections.
• Down — pressing once selects the menu, item, or value below the current selection; holding scrolls to the bottom
of the available selections.
• Forward — pressing once moves from menu to item to value.
• Back — pressing once moves from value to item to menu.

Monitoring the Ethernet LEDs on the Rear Panel

Each RJ45 connector on the Ultricore rear panel include two LEDs that report the ethernet communication activity
and speed. Refer to Figure 18.3 for LED locations on the Ultricore rear panel.

ENET Port 1 Speed LED ENET Port 2 Link/Activity LED

PORT 1 PORT 2
ETHERNET

ENET Port 1 Link/Activity LED ENET Port 2 Speed LED

Figure 18.3 ENET Ports on Rear Panel — LEDs

182 • Monitoring Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 18.1 provides basic LED descriptions.

Table 18.1 ENET Port LEDs

LED Status Description
ENET # - Green When lit green, this LED indicates a valid link is established on the
Link/Activity specified ENET port.
Flashing When flashing green, this LED indicates communication activity is
occurring on the specified ENET port.
Off When unlit, this LED indicates an invalid link is detected on the
specified ENET port. Verify the cable connection on the rear module
port and your network connections.
ENET # - Port Green When lit green, this LED indicates the ENET Port communication
Speed speed is at 1Gbps.
Yellow When lit orange, this LED indicates the ENET Port communication
speed is at 100Mbps.
Off When unlit, this LED indicates the ENET Port communication
speed is at 10Mbps.

If you have any questions pertaining to the installation or operation of Ultricore, please contact us at the numbers
listed in the section “Contacting Technical Support” on page 16. Our technical staff is always available for
consultation, training, or service.

Upgrading the Software

Ultricore is upgraded through the DashBoard client. To obtain the most recent upgrade package, contact Ross
Technical Support.
 Ensure that you are running DashBoard software version 8.0.0 or higher and that the computer running the
DashBoard client is located on the same network as the Ultricore panel.
To upgrade the Ultricore software
1. Contact Ross Technical Support for the latest software version file.
2. Ensure the Ultricore has a valid Ethernet connection.
3. Launch DashBoard by double-clicking its ion on your computer desktop.
4. Locate the Ultricore in the Tree View of DashBoard.
5. Expand the node for the Ultricore to display a list of sub-nodes in the Tree View.
6. Double-click the System Status node.
The System Status tabs display in the DashBoard window.
7. Click Upload, located near the bottom of the tab.
The Select File to Upload dialog opens.
8. Navigate to the *.bin file you want to upload.
9. Click Open.
10. Click Finish to start the upgrade.
11. Monitor the upgrade.
An Upload Status dialog enables you to monitor the upgrade process.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Monitoring • 183

  Avoid clicking Reboot until the Ultricore has successfully completed the file upload process and the OK button,
located in the bottom right corner of the dialog, is enabled.
12. Click OK to reboot the Ultricore.
The Reboot Confirm dialog opens, indicating the Ultricore will reboot.
13. Click Yes to continue the upgrade process.
 Ultricore is temporarily taken off-line during the reboot process. The process is complete once the status
indicators for the Ultricore return to their previous status.

184 • Monitoring Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 DashBoard Interface Overview
The DashBoard client software enables you to monitor, configure, and operate your Ultricore Central Controller.
Using the interfaces provided via the DashBoard client software, you can:
• Configure the network connection for your Ultricore
• Configure the connections to Ross NK Series routers via NK-NET or NK-IPS devices
• Configure the connections to Ross Ethernet routers and remote control panels
• Specify which attached routing devices or matrices to use
• Configure system levels and assign level names
• Assign physical router inputs and outputs to logical sources and destinations
• Configure source and destination labels
• Perform crosspoint preset/takes
• Monitor the status of multiple levels
• Create and use salvos

Ultricore in DashBoard
Ultricore groups the configuration, monitoring, and operating features in a Tree View in the DashBoard client
window. Each node of the tree opens to reveal one or more sub-nodes, giving access to the configuration options for
your system.
Ultricore includes the following interfaces, as separate nodes, in the DashBoard Tree View.

System Status
Double-clicking the System Status node displays two types of tabs within the same DashBoard window: Status
(read-only) tabs located on the left, and a series of Configuration tabs located on the right. This interface is similar
to an openGear® card tab system.

Database
Expanding the Database node enables you to configure the connection points, matrices, destinations, sources,
groups, levels, soft panels, and salvos for the system. The settings are saved locally on the Ultricore.

Devices
The sub-nodes under Devices provide a list of external devices in the routing system currently communicating with
the Ultricore.

Soft Panels
The Soft Panels tree provides access to the Matrix, MultiBus, and Category soft panels for the Ultricore. From these
panels you can perform crosspoint switches, and manage salvos via a DashBoard interface.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 185

 Terminology
Throughout the DashBoard interface, actual sockets (inputs and outputs) of a router (or matrix) are referred to by
hierarchical dotted notation: Frame.Slot.Port.Type.Channel where:
• Frame identifies the physical router/device housing the matrix/matrices.
• Slot identifies which slot of the matrix is located.
• Port identifies the physical input or output socket.
• Type identifies the generic signal type (e.g. SDI, audio).
• Channel identifies the audio channel within an SDI stream.
These designators may be assigned more user friendly names if required by editing the Port Labels interface.

System Status Interfaces

The System Status interface provides hardware information, IP Address settings, and general database management
for your Ultricore. The interface is organized into two distinct areas in the DashBoard window: Status tabs (located
on the left), and Configuration tabs (located on the right).

Figure 19.1 Example of a System Status Interface

Status Tabs
The Status tabs display read-only information about the Ultricore hardware and software.

Product Tab
Table 19.1 summarizes the read-only information displayed in the Product tab.

Table 19.1 Product Tab

Item Parameters Description
Product Indicates the Ultricore product name
Vendor Indicates the supplier/manufacturer of the device
System Version Indicates the build version of the Ultricore panel
Serial Number Indicates the serial number of the Ultricore panel

186 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 19.1 Product Tab
Item Parameters Description
Uptime #h #m #s Indicates the number of hours since the last reboot
of the Ultricore panel
System Time DD mm dd yyyy hh:mm:ss Indicates the current date based on the Ultricore
internal clock where:
• DD represents the calendar day
• mm represents the month
• dd represents the day
• yyyy represents the year
• hh:mm:ss represents the current local time

Other Tab
Table 19.2 summarizes the read-only information displayed in the Other tab.

Table 19.2 Other Tab

Item Parameters Description
Frontend SW Rev #
Read-only information used by Ross Technical
Backend SW Rev #
Support.
Device FW Rev #

Configuration Tabs
The Configuration tabs of the DashBoard window provide network setup options for the Ultricore panel and
managing the Ultricore databases.

Network Tab
Table 19.3 summarizes the fields and menus displayed in the Network tab. The options in the Network tab are
organized into two sections: Settings (editable fields), and Ethernet Redundancy (read-only fields).

Table 19.3 Network Tab

Item Parameters Description
Information
Active ENET ENET # Indicates which Ethernet port on the rear panel is the
primary Ultricore network connection
ENET # LINK Connected Indicates that a valid network link is configured on the
(x, y) specified Ethernet port of the Ultricore rear panel
where:
• x represents the speed in number of Mbps
• y represents the link type (e.g. full duplex)
Not Connected Ethernet communications for the Ultricore are invalid.
The Ethernet cable may be disconnected on the rear
panel or the Ethernet network may be down or
experiencing problems.
ENET MAC ###.###.###.### Indicates the MAC Address for the Ultricore
(read-only)

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 187

 Table 19.3 Network Tab
Item Parameters Description
Force ENET Failover Switches the primary Ultricore network connection to
other Ethernet port on the rear panel
Settings
Address ###.###.###.### Specifies the IP address for the Ultricore panel
Subnet Mask ###.###.###.### Specifies the subnet mask for the Ultricore panel
Gateway ###.###.###.### Specifies the gateway for communication outside of the
local area network (LAN)
Apply Updates the Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway
settings
Cancel Ignores any unsaved changes made to the Address,
Subnet Mask, and Gateway settings and reverts back to
the current running values.
SNMP
Enable SNMP Selected Enables the SNMP Agent on the Ultricore
Cleared Disables the SNMP Agent on the Ultricore
SNMP Community # Specifies the SNMP Agent identifier for
Name communications
SNMP Trap ###.###.###.### Specifies the target address the Ultricore sends SNMP
Destination IP Address traps to
Permitted Clients
DashBoards: ###.###.###.### Lists the IP Address of each DashBoard client that is
allowed to communicate with this Ultricore
Add Enables you to add a new DashBoard client to the
Permitted Clients list
Delete Deletes the selected DashBoard client from the
Permitted Clients list
Delete All Clears all entries in the Permitted Clients list
Edit Enables you to modify the selected entry in the
Permitted Clients list
Cancel Ignores any unsaved changes made to the Permitted
Clients list and reverts back to the current running
values.
Apply Updates the Permitted Clients list settings

188 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Database Tab
Table 19.4 summarizes the fields and menus displayed in the Database tab. The options in the Database tab are
organized into two sections: Current Database, and Database Management.
Table 19.4 Database Tab
Item Parameters Description
Current Databasea
Remote Controller Selected This Ultricore will be controlled by a remote (primary)
Mode Ultricore router. You must reboot this Ultricore before
the change can take effect.
Cleared This Ultricore is a standalone or is the primary system
controller for the routing system.
Name <name> Indicates the database currently loaded in Ultricore
Levels Indicates the number of levels the database is
configured for
Sources Indicates the number of inputs the database is
configured for
Destinations Indicates the number of outputs the database is
configured for
Enable Tally Selected Select this box to enable Ultricore to read tally
identifiers from the input signals. This information is
passed through to any assigned outputs.
Selecting this box also updates the Sources and
Destinations tabs with a new column “Tally” that is
used to assign Tally IDs to sources and/or destinations.
Cleared Tally information from the input signals is not read into
the database.
I/O Ports Refresh Updates the Matrix Inputs and Outputs lists in the
Sources and Destinations tabs respectively
Crosspoint Status Refresh Updates the Status field located directly below this
button
Status (read-only) Loaded The active database was successfully loaded.

Errorb One of the following has occurred:

• the selected database is no longer available
• an attempt was made to delete a non-existent database
• an attempt was made to save a database with an
existing name
Database Management - Load Database
Name <name> Selects the database to load for the Ultricore
Database Load Loads the specified database to the Ultricore
Database to RCPs Send Forces the currently loaded database settings to the
connected Remote Control Panels (RCPs)
Database Management - Add Database

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 189

 Table 19.4 Database Tab
Item Parameters Description
Include I/O Maps Creates a database to match the quantity of BNC I/O
fitted in the router. Each input / output SDI port will be
mapped to default labels of SRC xx and DST xx
respectively.
• I/O mapping occurs for Level 1 only (SDI)
• the Sources field is ignored
• the Destination field is ignored
• the Level field is applied
Name <name> Provides a unique identifier for the new database (up to
32 characters)
Levels # Specifies the total number of levels the database will
make available
Sources # Specifies the total number of sources the database will
make available
Destinations # Specifies the number of levels the database will make
available
Database Add Uses the settings in the Database Management fields to
create a new database
Database Management - Delete Database
Name <name> Selects the database to delete
Database Delete Deletes the currently selected database

a. The Levels, Sources, and Destinations fields indicate the initial values when the database was
created. Levels, Sources, and Destinations can be removed from or added to the database on
their respective configuration tabs. Doing so will not alter the fields in the Database tab.
b. This message displays for a maximum of 10 seconds only.

Transfer Tab
Table 19.5 summarizes the options displayed in the Transfer tab.
Table 19.5 Transfer Tab
Item Parameters Description
Export
Database: <database name> Selects the database to be exported
Save As: *.uda Automatically updates with the name of the database
archive
Browse... Enables you to save or re-name the database to a
specific location. The default location is
Apply Click to begin exporting the file to specified location
Import
Archive File: *.uda Indicates the last file that was imported
Browse... Enables you to specify the database to import
Retrieve Database As: <database name> Indicates the file currently selected for importing
Apply Click to begin the import

190 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Setup Tab
Table 19.6 summarizes the options displayed in the Setup tab.
Table 19.6 Setup Tab
Item Parameters Description
Device Name <name> Provides a unique identifier for the Ultricore in the Tree View
System Name <name> Provides a unique identifier for the routing system
Logging Selected Enables the Ultricore to update the entries in the System Logs
interface
Cleared Disables this feature
Output Debug Selected Only use this feature under the guidance of Ross Technical
Messages Support.
Cleared
DashBoard 10-300s Sets the maximum number of seconds that DashBoard waits
Timeout until it queries the Ultricore. The default is 10 seconds. This
value is reset after a power-cycle.
Timeout Update Applies the new value in the DashBoard Timeout menu.
Status mm/dd/yy Reports when multiple devices, with the same name, are
ERROR: communicating with the Ultricore where:
Duplicate device • mm/dd/yy represents the date of the error
name [abc] for ID
• [abc] represents the device name
[#]
• [#] represents the ID number assigned to the device
Clear Clears the Status field entry

Logs Tab
This tab includes the System Log, Controller Communications Log, and DashBoard Communications Log. The
read-only information displayed in the logs is used by Ross Technical Support for diagnostic purposes.

Database Interfaces
The Database interfaces enable you to configure devices in your routing system and configure control aspects for
Ultricore. Note that the currently active database name is displayed in parentheses in the tree view. Unicode names
are also supported so that names may be defined in other languages or writing systems.
Most of the interfaces are organized into a table format with a row of buttons at the bottom of the interface. You can
select individual cells, columns, or rows of entries to define.
A summary of each interface is provided in the following sub-sections.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 191

 Figure 19.2 Example of Filling a Column of Entries

Figure 19.3 Example of Filling a Row of Entries

Database Builder
The Database Builder interface helps you to quickly create a database by grouping basic controls on four pages:
Quick Start, Levels, Destinations, and Sources. The same controls are available as sub-nodes of the Database
interface.

Quick Start
The Quick Start options display by default when the Database Builder displays in DashBoard. From this page you
can define the database properties including: type of signals (video, audio) the number of Ultricore routers that the
database includes, the audio elements of the database, and basic UltriScape parameters.

192 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Figure 19.4 Example of the Database Builder — Quick Start Page

Table 19.8 summarizes the fields displayed in the options in the Quick Start page.
Table 19.7 Database Builder — Quick Start
Item Parameters Description
Database name <name> Assigns a unique identifier for the device in the routing
system. This name is also used when matrices are defined in
the Ultricore system.
Frame select table Displays a list of detected routers in your network. Select a
box to apply the database to the specified router.
Include AUX ports None Do not create entries for AUX ports in the database
Insert at slot Create AUX port entries as they are physically located
within the Ultricore chassis (e.g. ports 17 and 18).
At the end Create AUX ports after BNC entries
Video support Yes Creates a database that includes video and audio signals
No Creates an audio-only database
Audio channels # Specifies the quantity of audio channels (levels) required
Breakaway source Yes Create sources for audio breakaways/shuffles
support
No Audio breakaways are not included in this database
SDI audio per channel Creates audio breakaway sources using the selected audio
channel grouping size
MADI channels per Creates MADI sources using the selected audio channel
source grouping size
Disconnect source? Yes Creates a source that will disconnect (mute) SDI and audio
channels
No This option is not included in the database
Passthrough source? Yes Sources are routed without changes/edits
No This option is not included in the database

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 193

 Table 19.7 Database Builder — Quick Start
Item Parameters Description
Ultriscape support? Yes Enables Ultriscape heads and PiPs to be included in the
database
No Ultriscape heads and PiPs are not included in the database
Number of Multiviewer # Specifies the number of Ultriscape heads the database will
heads support
Number of Multiviewer # Specifies the maximum number of PiPs available per layout
pips per head
Include detected Creates sources for detected Ultriscape layouts to enable
Multiviewer layout layout changing from control panels

Levels
Once you defined the options on the Quick Start interface, you can proceed to preview and customize the levels,
destinations, and sources this database will include. Clicking Next on the Quick Start page displays the Levels
page. (Figure 19.5)
The options in the Levels page are organized into a table where each row represents a level and the columns provide
the options for configuring that level. From this page you assign a unique name to each level, a color that represents
the level to make it easier to identify the level in a soft panel.

Figure 19.5 Example of the Database Builder — Levels Page

Destinations
Clicking Next on the Levels page displays the Destinations page. (Figure 19.6)
The Destinations page enables the assignment of logical labels (used by remote control panels and soft panels) to
physical outputs of the attached matrices or routers. The options in the Destination page are organized into a table
where each row associates a name of the destination with one or more logical matrix output sockets.

194 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Figure 19.6 Example of the Database Builder — Destinations Page

Sources
Clicking Next on the Destinations page displays the Sources page. (Figure 19.7)
The Sources page enables the assignment of labels (used by remote control panels and soft panels) to inputs of the
attached matrices or routers. The options in the Sources page are organized into a table where each row associates a
name of the source with one or more logical matrix input sockets.

Figure 19.7 Example of the Database Builder — Sources Page

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 195

 Connections Tab
Ross Video devices are automatically discovered and available for connection in this tab. Third-party devices that
are not discoverable via their protocol must be manually added. This tab is divided into two tables: Clients and
Servers.

Figure 19.8 Example of Entries in a Connections Tab

Clients Table
The Clients table lists the connection details of remote client devices (e.g. external devices connecting to this
Ultricore) currently communicating with the Ultricore.
Table 19.8 summarizes the read-only fields displayed in the Clients table in the Connections tab.
Table 19.8 Connections Tab — Clients
Item Parameters Description
Device ID <name> Specifies the external device for the connection
point
Name <name> Assigns a unique identifier for the device in the
routing system. This name is also used when
matrices are defined in the Ultricore system.
Protocol GVG Native The device uses the third-party GVG protocol to
(read-only) communicate.
Refer to “GVG Series 7000 Native Protocol
Commands” on page 163.
NVISION This device communicates via the third-party
NVISION protocol. Refer to “NVISION
Commands” on page 168.
OGP This device uses the openGear Protocol to
communicate with Ultricore.
Probel SW-P-08 The device uses the third-party protocol known as
Probel SW-P-08.

196 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 19.8 Connections Tab — Clients
Item Parameters Description
Protocol Ross NK The device uses the Ross NK protocol to
(read-only) communicate. Refer to “Connecting to Ross NK
Series Devices” on page 55.
TSL UMD v3.1 The device uses TSL UMD protocol version 3.1
TSL UMD v4.0 The device uses TSL UMD protocol version 4.0
TSL UMD v5.0 The device uses TSL UMD protocol version 5.0
Ultrix The device uses the Ross Ultrix protocol to
communicate (TCP only).
Communication type: t-bus The device is physically connected to a T-BUS
port on the Ultricore rear panel. Communication is
via the Ross T-BUS protocol.
type: tcp The device is communicating over a network
connection. Note that the DashBoard client
computer, the Ultricore, and the external device
must be on the same network.
type: serial The device is physically connected to a COM port
on the Ultricore rear panel. The device is
communicating with the Ultricore via a serial
protocol.
ip: ###.###.###.### Specifies the IP Address of the device on the
network
ip: localhost Indicates that the device is the one you are
currently configuring
port:###.###.###.### Specifies the ethernet port the device is associated
with on the network.
Communication ... This button opens a dialog allowing further
connection point setting adjustments such as
specifying an IP address, IP port, etc.
Details Provides additional information on the device such
as device type, and firmware version

Servers Table
The Servers table lists the connection details of external devices that Ultricore has established a connection point to
(e.g. devices that are controlled by this Ultricore). Entries in the Servers table are managed by the user as outlined in
the chapter “Device Communication Setup” on page 51.
Table 19.9 Connections Tab — Servers
Item Parameters Description
ID # Auto-numbered field (read-only).
Device ID <name> Specifies the external device for the connection
point
Name <name> Assigns a unique identifier for the device in the
routing system. This name is also used when
matrices are defined in the Ultricore system.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 197

 Table 19.9 Connections Tab — Servers
Item Parameters Description
Enabled Enable Direct communication is established between
Ultricore and the device.
Disable Communication between Ultricore and the device
is unavailable.
Connected Connect A valid connection is established between the
(read-only) device and the Ultricore on your network. This box
is automatically selected when communication is
established.
Disconnect The connection is invalid or absent between the
device and the Ultricore on your network.
Protocol GVG Native The device uses the third-party GVG protocol to
(read-only) communicate. Refer to “GVG Series 7000 Native
Protocol Commands” on page 163.
NVISION This device communicates via the third-party
NVISION protocol. Refer to “NVISION
Commands” on page 168.
Probel SW-P-08 The device uses the third-party protocol known as
Probel SW-P-08.
Ross NK The device uses the Ross NK protocol to
communicate. Refer to “Connecting to Ross NK
Series Devices” on page 55.
TSL UMD v3.1 The device uses TSL UMD protocol version 3.1
TSL UMD v4.0 The device uses TSL UMD protocol version 4.0
TSL UMD v5.0 The device uses TSL UMD protocol version 5.0
Ultrix The device uses the Ross Ultrix protocol to
communicate (TCP only).
Communication type: t-bus The device is physically connected to a T-BUS
port on the Ultricore rear panel. Communication is
via the Ross T-BUS protocol.
type: tcp The device is communicating over a network
connection. Note that the DashBoard client
computer, the Ultricore, and the external device
must be on the same network.
type: serial The device is physically connected to a COM port
on the Ultricore rear panel. The device is
communicating with the Ultricore via a serial
protocol.
ip: ###.###.###.### Specifies the IP Address of the device on the
network
ip: localhost Indicates that the device is the one you are
currently configuring

198 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 19.9 Connections Tab — Servers
Item Parameters Description
Communication port:###.###.###.### Specifies the ethernet port the device is associated
with on the network.
... This button opens a dialog allowing further
connection point setting adjustments such as
specifying an IP address, IP port, etc.

Third Party Matrices Tab

Once connection points are established with the devices in your routing system, use the Third Party Matrices tab
to import the logical matrices from those devices into the Ultricore database.

Figure 19.9 Example of Entries in a Third Party Matrices Tab

Table 19.10 summarizes the options displayed in the Third Party Matrices tab.

Table 19.10 Third Party Matrices Tab

Item Parameters Description
ID # Auto-numbered field (read-only).
Name <name> Assigns a unique identifier for the imported third
party matrix to be used by the Ultricore database.
First Output # Specifies the first destination for the device within
the Ultricore database
Last Output # Specifies the last destination for the device within
the Ultricore database
First Input # Specifies the first source for the device within the
Ultricore database
Last Input # Specifies the last source for the device within the
Ultricore database
Level # Specifies the number of levels for the device in the
Ultricore database

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 199

 Table 19.10 Third Party Matrices Tab
Item Parameters Description
Type Specifies the signal type of inputs and outputs this
device provides within the Ultricore database
Device ID Specifies the external third-party device the
imported logical matrix applies to

Port Labels Tab

The Port Labels tab lists the matrices discovered by the connection points on the Connections tab and imported via
the Third Party Matrices tab. A matrix (or router) socket is identified via the Frame.Slot.Port.Type.Channel
nomenclature. Custom labels may be applied to the ports if required. These may be also known as actual labels in
other terminology (the name the cable would be assigned). This re-naming is not necessary for operation, but it may
make your assignment of source and destination labels easier when using your internal cable naming conventions.

Figure 19.10 Example of Entries in a Port Labels Tab

Table 19.8 summarizes the options displayed in the main area of the Port Labels tab (from left to right on the
interface).

Table 19.11 Port Labels Tab

Item Description
Matrix: Provides a list of configured matrices for the currently loaded database.
Double-click an item in the list to update the table in the Port Labels tab.
By default, each router is represented by a read-only matrix in this list. This
read-only matrix lists all the SDI signals available to the Ultricore via that router. If
you have multiple routers, each router is represented with a separate read-only
matrix with the device name in the matrix name (e.g. NK-3G16.SDI
[read-only], or NK-3G144.SDI [read-only]).

200 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 19.11 Port Labels Tab
Item Description
Port Indicates the physical socket on the external device that is included in the currently
selected logical matrix using the nomenclature Frame.Slot.Port.Type.Channel.
Label Provides a text label that identifies the physical port in other interfaces of the
database. This virtual label is used instead of the Frame.Slot.Port.Type.Channel
format. For example, you might re-name port NK-S34.slot1.in[1].SDI.ch1
to NK-234 SDI IN 1-1.

Bottom Toolbar
Refer to Table 19.35 for a summary of the buttons displayed in the Bottom toolbar of the Database interfaces.

Levels Tab
A level is a specific grouping of signal input and output ports, that may be controlled separately from other groups
(a breakaway). Typically a level is associated with input/output ports that are used with sets of similar or related
signals, such as SDI Video, AES Audio, Analog Video, Analog Audio, Timecode, or Machine control, and often
include routing matrices that are dedicated to controlling that specific type of signal.
The options in the Levels tab are organized into a table where each row represents a level and the columns provide
the options for configuring that level. From this tab you can assign a unique name to each level, a color that
represents the level, and a textual description of the level to make it easier to identify the level in the soft panels.

Figure 19.11 Example of Entries in a Levels Tab

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 201

 Destinations Tab
The Destination tab enables the assignment of labels (used by control panels) to outputs of the attached matrices or
routers. The options in the Destination tab are organized into a table where each row associates the name of the
destination with one or more logical matrix output sockets.

Figure 19.12 Example of Entries in a Destinations Tab

Table 19.12 summarizes the options displayed in the Destinations tab.

Table 19.12 Destinations Tab

Item Parameters Description
ID # Auto-numbered field (read-only).
Tally TSL v3.1 <displayID> Displays the TSL protocol Tally ID entry. The
Enable Tally box is selected in the Database tab.
TSL 4.0 <displayID>
TSL v5.0 <screenID>:<displayID>
Tally Redirect Enables/disables the re-direction of connected
source Tally ID to destination Tally ID as set by
the Tally field
Name <name> Assigns a unique identifier for the destination in
the routing system. This name is also used when
matrices are defined in the Ultricore system.
Description Provides additional information or user entered
notes about the output
Level # Specifies the physical output port associated with
the destination and assigns it to the specified level.
Unless you have given the port a different label via
the Port Labels tab, the port is labeled as
Frame.Slot.Port.Type.Channel.

202 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 19.12 Destinations Tab
Item Parameters Description
Matrix # Lists all the physical output ports available that can
Outputs be assigned as a destination in the routing system
Assign Click this button to add the selected physical
output port(s) to the list of Destinations for the
database.

For More Information on...

• the buttons located on the bottom toolbar for the Destinations tab, refer to Table 19.35.

Sources Tab
The Sources tab enables the assignment of labels (used by remote control panels and soft panels) to physical input
sources to specific sources based on the routers connected to the Ultricore (and listed in the Database interface).
The rows in the table are dependent on the database that is currently loaded. The Sources tab is organized into a
table where each row associates a name of the source with one or more logical matrix input sockets.

Figure 19.13 Example of Entries in a Sources Tab

Table 19.13 summarizes the options displayed in the Sources tab.

Table 19.13 Sources Tab

Item Parameters Description
ID # Auto-numbered field (read-only).
Tally <displayID> or Displays the TSL protocol tally ID entry. The
<screenID>:<displaydID> Enable Tally box is selected in the Database tab.
Name <name> Assigns a unique identifier for the source in the
routing system. This name is also used when
matrices are defined in the Ultricore system.
Description Provides additional information or user entered
notes about the input

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 203

 Table 19.13 Sources Tab
Item Parameters Description
Level # Specifies the physical input port associated with
the source and assigns it to the specified level.
Unless you have given the port a different label via
the Port Labels tab, the port is labeled as
Frame.Slot.Port.Type.Channel.
Matrix Inputs # Lists all the physical input ports available that can
be assigned as a source in the routing system
Assign Click this button to add the selected physical input
port to the Source label in the database

Cat/Index Categories Tab

The Cat/Index Categories tab enables you to categorize sources, destinations, and levels via a hierarchal system of
tags. You can use categories to filter sources, destinations or levels into manageable groups for a Category soft
panel.Refer to the section “Using Category Panels” on page 125 for more information.

Figure 19.14 Example of Entries in a Cat/Index Categories Tab

Categories Area
Table 19.14 summarizes the options displayed in the Categories area of the Cat/Index Categories tab.

Table 19.14 Cat/Index Categories — Categories Area

Item Parameters Description
Categories: Lists the category tags defined for this database
Add Adds a category tag
Delete Deletes the selected tag
Delete All Deletes all tags listed in the Categories: pane
Generate Automatically generates category tags based on
the entires in your database

204 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Affected Resources Area
Table 19.15 summarizes the options displayed in the Affected Resources area of the Cat/Index Categories tab.

Table 19.15 Cat/Index Categories — Affected Resources Area

Item Parameters Description
Destinations: <text> Lists the destinations that are tagged
Find Performs a search for destinations in the database
to add to the category
Sources: <text> Lists the sources that are tagged
Find Performs a search for sources in the database to
add to the category
Levels: <text> Lists the levels that are tagged
Find Performs a search for level in the database to add
to the category

Indexes Area
Table 19.16 summarizes the options displayed in the Indexes area of the Cat/Index Categories tab.

Table 19.16 Cat/Index Categories — Indexes Area

Item Parameters Description
Indexes: Creates search terms to define category tags
Add Adds a new entry to the Indexes list
Delete Deletes the selected entry from the Indexes list
Delete All Deletes all entries from the Indexes list
Default Creates indexes 0-9 and A-F

Inaccessible Resources Area

Table 19.17 summarizes the options displayed in the Inaccessible Resources area of the Cat/Index Categories tab.

Table 19.17 Cat/Index Categories — Inaccessible Resources Area

Item Parameters Description
Destinations: <text> Lists the destinations in the current database that
are not included in any Cat/Index categories
Generate Automatically generates category tags based on
the destinations in your database
Create Enables you to create a new Cat/Index filter for
Destinations
Sources: <text> Lists the sources in the current database that are
not included in any Cat/Index categories
Generate Automatically generates category tags based on
the sources in your database
Create Enables you to create a new Cat/Index filter for
Sources

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 205

 Table 19.17 Cat/Index Categories — Inaccessible Resources Area
Item Parameters Description
Levels: <text> Lists the levels in the current database that are not
included in any classic categories
Generate Automatically generates category tags based on
the levels in your database
Create Enables you to create a new Cat/Index filter for
Sources

Group Categories Tab

The Categories tab enables you to categorize sources, destinations, and levels via a hierarchal system of tags. You
can use categories to filter sources, destinations or levels into manageable groups for a Category soft panel.Refer to
the section “Group Categories Overview” on page 91 for more information.

Figure 19.15 Example of Entries in a Group Categories Tab

The Group Categories tab is organized into three panels and a bottom toolbar.
Table 19.18 summarizes the options displayed in the left panel of the Group Categories tab. This panel displays all
the created groups and sub-groups, and/or resources in a top-down hierarchy. Note that the nodes are sorted by type
and then by alphabetical order.

Table 19.18 Group Categories Tab — Left Panel

Item Description
Group Categories: Displays the groups as folders arranged in a tree view
Find Displays the Find dialog that enables you to search for a category or resource name
Move Displays the Move dialog that enables you to move a selected group and its
contents to another group
Rename Renames a selected group; the resource type will be not re-named
Delete Deletes a selected group and all of its contents
Add Adds a new group to the selected group

206 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 19.19 summarizes the options displayed in the middle panel of the Group Categories tab. This panel shows
the assigned contents (groups and/or resources) of the currently selected item from the tree view (in the left panel).

Table 19.19 Group Categories Tab — Middle Panel

Item Description
Name Indicates the name of a resource
Type Indicates the type of resource
Delete Deletes the selected resource(s) from the currently selected group

Table 19.20 summarizes the options displayed in the right panel of the Group Categories tab. This panel displays
the available destinations, sources, and levels that can be arranged into group categories.

Table 19.20 Group Categories Tab — Right Panel

Item Description
Destinations Displays the unassigned destinations in alphabetical order
Sources Displays the unassigned sources in alphabetical order
Levels Displays the unassigned levels in alphabetical order
Assign Select the resource(s) and click Assign to assign it to the group selected in the left
table

Table 19.21 summarizes the bottom toolbar.

Table 19.21 Group Categories Tab — Bottom Toolbar
Item Description
Auto Generate Click to auto-generate group categories based on the resource names from the
current database
Cancel Ignores all unsaved changes and reverts the tab back to the last saved entries
Apply Applies all change made in the Group Categories tab

Legacy Categories Tab

The Legacy Categories tab enables you to categorize sources, destinations, and levels via a hierarchal system of
tags. You can use legacy categories to filter sources, destinations, or levels into manageable groups for legacy
RCP-QE panels. Refer to the RCP-QE User Guide for details.
Table 19.22 summarizes the options displayed in the top toolbar.

Table 19.22 Legacy Categories Tab — Top Toolbar

Item Description
Destinations Lists the destination category/index assignments
Sources Lists the source category/index assignments
Levels Lists the level category/index assignments

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 207

 Table 19.23 summarizes the options displayed when the Edit button is selected from the bottom toolbar.
Table 19.23 Legacy Categories Tab — Bottom Toolbar
Item Description
Copy Copies the selected cells in the tab
Paste Pastes the previously copied items to the current cell selection
Clear Clears the data from the selected cells
Clear All Clears all category/index assignments
Fill Auto fills a range of cells
Auto Generate Auto fills the cells based on spaces in the source/destination names

Salvos Tab
A salvo is a set of pre-defined switch events. The Salvos tab provides a list of the global salvos available in the
currently selected database. From this tab you can create salvos, rename, and delete salvos.
The workspace in the Salvos tab displays a grid pattern with sources at the top and the destinations along the left
side. A list of currently available (saved) salvos displays on the far left-side of the tab. The toolbar on the far
right-side displays a button for each level available in the database with each button set in the color specified for the
level. The toolbar in the bottom right corner of the interface displays three buttons: Advanced, Cancel, and Apply.

Figure 19.16 Example of a Salvos Tab

Table 19.24 summarizes the options displayed in the Salvos tab.

Table 19.24 Buttons on the Salvos Interface

Button Description
Salvos: Provides a list of configured salvos for the currently loaded database. Double-click
an item in the list to update the grid in the Salvos tab.
Edit... Displays the Edit dialog for the soft panel. Refer to “Edit Dialogs” on page 217.

208 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 19.24 Buttons on the Salvos Interface
Button Description
Select All Click this button to select all the Destinations in the matrix of the Salvos tab. This
will include all the destinations in the matrix in the salvo configuration.
• All the Destination buttons are lit red in the matrix.
• The button now displays the Clear All label. Click the button again to remove all
the Destinations from the salvo configuration.
Level # A button is assigned to each level available in the currently loaded database. The
color and label of the button is specified in the Levels tab.
Advanced Displays the Advanced options outlined in Table 19.25.
Cancel Discards any recent changes made in the Salvos tab, and clears the matrix. Note
that the Destinations are still selected (buttons are lit red) if you clicked Select All.
Apply Applies changes made in the Salvos tab and updates the salvo settings.

Advanced Menus
Clicking the Advanced button in the Salvos tab displays the options outlined in Table 19.25.

Table 19.25 Advanced Menu Items

Button Description
Clear All Presets Clears the workspace in the Salvos tab and resets all settings to the default values.
Clear Dest Presets Clears all selections made in the Destinations column of the workspace.
Capture System Status Captures the current routing state of the Ultricore system.
Capture Dest Status Updates the workspace to reflect only the status of the destinations of the Ultricore
system.

Ultricore Profiles Tab

The Ultricore Profiles operate as a form of hierarchical database where user permissions are organized into a
tree-like format. A profile determines which groups and pages that a user can access.
When the ULTRICORE-PRO license is enabled, the Ultricore Profiles interface is organized into five distinct areas.
(Figure 19.17) Each area is briefly described in this section starting with the leftmost area of the DashBoard
window.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 209

 Figure 19.17 Example of the Ultricore Profiles Interface with the ULTRICORE-PRO license

Users
When the system is configured to use the user login mechanism, a list of all currently configured usernames along
with their current online status displays in this area.

Profiles
A list of all currently configured profiles. Selecting a profile (row) in this area automatically updates the items
displayed in the Profile Details, Device Tree, and Options areas.

Profile Details
This area displays the details of the profile showing the conditions under which the tree in the following section will
be applied.

Tree Nodes
A visual representation of the tree view that is defined in the Profile Details. Note that certain entries that are
specific to licenses or other conditions may be visible but not in the actual tree view. Should conditions change that
enable those entries, they will appear as shown in this display. A profile also maintains the position of items in
groups allowing the most relevant items to be the easiest to reach.
The tree nodes are organized in a hierarchy where the top level (blue icons) list system specific options, and
secondary levels (yellow icons) list specific functions.
 This area only displays when the ULTRICORE-PRO license is enabled.

Group Tabs
This area displays all the available items that have not yet been assigned to the currently selected profile but are
available to define.
 This area only displays when the ULTRICORE-PRO license is enabled.

210 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Panels Tab
The Panels tab includes a series of sub-tabs that enable you to customize soft panels (control panels within the
DashBoard environment). You can choose to assign the levels, sources, and destinations from an Ultricore database
to the soft panel buttons.
The soft panels display as sub-nodes in the Soft Panels tree using the name specified in the Info tab. When you save
a soft panel to the database, a node for the panel automatically displays under the Soft Panels node in the Tree View.
The soft panels display in the tree according to their assigned Panel ID number (where an ID of 1 is the highest, and
ID of 2 is the second highest etc.).

Figure 19.18 Example of Entries in a Panels Tab

Panels Menu
The Panels menu displays on the left side of the interface. This menu provides a list of soft panels saved in the
current database. Selecting a soft panel from the list updates the tab entires in the Panels tab with the settings for
that soft panel.

Info Tab
Use the options in the Info tab to assign a panel a unique identifier, select the panel style template to use, and how
the panel will perform tasks such as Take transitions. This is the default tab that the interface opens on. Table 19.26
summarizes the fields and menus displayed in the Info tab.

Table 19.26 Info Tab

Item Parameters Description
Panel Style <name> Specifies the panel type that was assigned to the soft panel
(read-only) when it was created.
Panel ID <integer> Specifies the
Panel Name <name> Provides a unique identifier for the soft panel. This name
also displays as a sub-node in the Soft Panels tree.
Description # Provides a textual summary of the soft panel or additional
information about the panel.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 211

 Table 19.26 Info Tab
Item Parameters Description
Protection Lock Displays only the Lock button in the panel interface
Operation
Protect Displays only the Protect button in the panel interface
Both Displays the Lock and Protect buttons in the panel interface
Take Confirm A TAKE button displays on the soft panel. You must click
Operation this button before the transition occurs
Direct A Take transition occurs automatically when a Level,
Destination, and Source are selected on the soft panel.
Selection Single The Multi Select button does not display on the soft panel.
Operation
Multi Displays the Multi Select button on the soft panel. Use this
button to quickly select multiple destinations for a
crosspoint switch.
This button is only applicable for MultiBus and Category
panels.
Machine Enable Displays a Machine Control button on the panel.
Control When selected on the panel, this Machine Control button
sends a Take request directed to a Ross NK-M series data
router to automatically make the reciprocal port switch. On
a video router, the connection is all one way from an input
port to an output port (e.g. such as from IN 1 to OUT 2).
Disable Does not display a Machine Control button on the panel.
Nongroup Hide Resources that are not assigned to a specific group are not
Resourcesa displayed on the soft panel.
Show All resources are displayed on the soft panel.

a. This menu is only available when the Panel Style is set to Group Category.

Levels Tab
Use the options in the Levels tab to specify the number of levels for the panel, and organize them in a hierarchy for
the panel. Table 19.27 summarizes the fields and menus displayed in the Levels tab.

Table 19.27 Levels Tab

Item Parameters Description
Viewable <integer> Specifies the maximum number of levels, as
Levels selectable buttons, that can display on the panel
interface
Available <integer> List all the levels in the current database
Assigned <integer> Specifies which levels will be available in the soft
panel

212 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Destinations Tab
Use the options in the Destinations tab to specify which router outputs will be available in Destination bus of the
soft panel. Table 19.28 summarizes the fields and menus displayed in the Destinations tab.
Table 19.28 Destinations Tab
Item Parameters Description
Viewable <integer> Specifies the maximum number of destinations, as
Destinations selectable buttons, on the panel. This field is not
displayed when the Panel Style is set to Group
Category or Cat/Index Category.
Available <integer> Lists all the destinations in the current database
Assigned <integer> Specifies which destinations will be available in
the soft panel

Sources Tab
Use the options in the Sources tab to specify which router inputs will be available in Source bus of the soft panel,
and their hierarchy. Table 19.29 summarizes the fields and menus displayed in the Sources tab.
Table 19.29 Sources Tab
Item Parameters Description
Viewable <integer> Specifies the maximum number of sources, as
Sources selectable buttons, on the panel. This field is not
displayed when the Panel Style is set to Group
Category or Cat/Index Category.
Available <integer> Lists all the sources in the current database
Assigned <integer> Specifies which sources will be available in the
soft panel

Salvos Tab
Use the options in the Salvos tab to specify the total number of salvos displayed in the soft panel and their
hierarchy. Table 19.30 summarizes the fields and menus displayed in the Salvos tab.
Table 19.30 Salvos Tab
Item Parameters Description
Viewable # Specifies the maximum number of salvos that will
salvos be listed on the Recall Salvos dialog for the panel.
This field is not displayed when the Panel Style is
set to Matrix.
Available # Lists all the salvos in the current database
Assigned # Specifies which salvos will be available in the soft
panel

Favorites Tab
 The Favorites tab only displays when the Panel Style is set to Ultritouch PB.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 213

 Table 19.31 summarizes the fields and menus displayed in the Favorites tab.
Table 19.31 Favorites Tab
Item Parameters Description
Name <name> Provides a unique identifier for the type of Favorite for this
soft panel.
Type Crosspoint Creates a Favorites button on the soft panel that recalls a
specific crosspoints switch
Group Creates a Favorites button on the soft panel that loads a
specific Group Category in the database
Salvo Creates a Favorites button on the soft panel that recalls a
specific salvo in the database
Sources Creates a Favorites button on the soft panel that selects a
specific source in the database
Destinations Creates a Favorites button on the soft panel that selects a
specific destination in the database
Field 1 Specifies the first item for the Favorite. For example, if the
type is set to Crosspoint, Field 1 reports the destination.
Field 2 Specifies the second item for the Favorite. For example, if
the type is set to Crosspoint, Field 2 reports the source.
Up Moves the selected row higher in the table
Down Moves the selected row lower in the table
Top Moves the selected row to the top of the table
Bottom Moves the selected row to the bottom of the table
Sort Sorts by window type

Home View Tab

 The Home View tab only displays when the Panel Style is set to Ultritouch PB or Push Button.
Table 19.32 summarizes the options displayed in the Home View tab.
Table 19.32 Home View Tab
Item Parameters Description
Display Icons Enable The Destination and Source buttons on the soft panel
display icons
Disabled The Destination and Source buttons do not display icons;
only the labels are displayed on each button.
Orientation Portrait The windows are organized into columns (vertical panes)
on the soft panel
Landscape windows are organized into rows (horizontal panes) on the
soft panel
Home Windows
Window (read-only) <text> Specifies the window type
Percent # Specifies the width of the window in a percentage of the
overall soft panel size
Rows # Specifies the number of button rows in the window

214 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 19.32 Home View Tab
Item Parameters Description
Columns # Specifies the number of button columns in the window
Reset Loads the default window layout and widths
Up Moves the selected row higher in the table
Down Moves the selected row lower in the table
Top Moves the selected row to the top of the table
Bottom Moves the selected row to the bottom of the table
Sort Sorts by window type

Buttons
Table 19.33 summarizes the buttons displayed in all Panel sub-tabs.

Table 19.33 Button on the Panels Interface

Button Description

In the Available area, clicking this button toggles the sorting order between
alphabetical or database-index (based on the current order listed in the Levels,
Destinations, or Sources tabs)

Moves the selected items in the Available list to the Assigned list.

Moves the selected item(s) from the Assigned list back to the Available list. These
items will not be available in the soft panel window.
Moves all the available labels to the Assigned list

Removes all the items from the Assigned list back to the Available list. These items
will not be available in the soft panel window.
Up Moves the selected item in the Assigned list up one position. This changes the
order of the displayed items on the soft panel.
Down Moves the selected item in the Assigned list down one position. This changes the
order of the displayed items on the soft panel.
Top Moves the selected item in the Assigned list to the top of the list. This changes the
order of the displayed items on the soft panel.
Bottom Moves the selected item in the Assigned list to the bottom of the list. This changes
the order of the displayed items on the soft panel.

In the Assigned area, clicking this button arranges the items into alphanumerical
order.

In the Assigned area, clicking this button arranges the items in the Assigned list
according to the order established in the Levels, Destinations, or Sources tabs.

Edit... Displays the Edit dialog for the soft panel

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 215

 Table 19.33 Button on the Panels Interface
Button Description
Cancel Discards any recent changes made in the soft panel, and reverts to the previously
saved settings.
Apply Applies changes made in the soft panel and updates the Ultricore database

Destination Follow Tab

Table 19.34 summarizes the options displayed in the Destination Follow tab.
Table 19.34 Destination Follow Tab
Item Parameters Description
Destination # Specifies the Destination you want to configure
Following # Specifies the router output that the specified Destination
will follow

Additional Dialogs, Menus, and Toolbars in the Database Interfaces

Each tab displays a toolbar located at the bottom that provides buttons that display additional editing dialogs (e.g.
insert, cut, paste, search). Also, right-clicking a row in any tab also displays a menu of editing dialogs. This section
briefly outlines those additional editing dialogs.

Bottom Toolbar
The bottom toolbar of each tab in the Database includes buttons for applying changes made to settings in the
interface, or adding elements to the table in the interface. Table 19.35 summarizes the buttons displayed in the
Bottom toolbar. Note that not all buttons display in all tabs.
Table 19.35 Bottom Toolbar Items
Button Description
Edit Displays the Edit dialog for the tab. Refer to Table 19.36 for details.
Find Displays the Find dialog that enables the entering of criteria for searching of the
tab contents.
Fill Label Applies a custom label to the selected port
Reset Label Reverts the label content to the previously saved text
Delete Removes the selected port from the list for the matrix
Add Adds the selected port from the list for the matrix
Cancel Discards any recent changes made in the tab, and reverts to the previously saved
table settings.
Apply Applies changes made in the tab and updates the Ultricore database

216 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Edit Dialogs
Table 19.36 summarizes the buttons displayed in the Edit dialogs. Note that not all options display in all tabs.
Table 19.36 Edit Dialogs Items
Button Description
Add In interfaces with lists on the left toolbar (e.g. Panels, Port Labels, Salvos),
selecting a list item and then clicking Add creates a copy of the selected item. The
name to the newly created item includes the name from the copied item with the
prefix “New”.
Auto Generate Automatically fills the cells in the table with a default value. For example, clicking
this button in the Destinations tab automatically fills all the cells with the text
“Dest”.
Clear Removes the data from the selected cell.
Clear All Removes the text or entry in all cells of the interface.
Copy Copies the selected cell data to the clipboard. In some interfaces, such as in the
Salvo tab, the salvo settings are copied in entirety.
Cut Copies the cell data to the clipboard and then delete it from the table.

Deletea When working in an interface with a table layout, clicking this button removes the
currently active row from the table.
When working in an interface with lists on the left toolbar, clicking this button
removes the selected item from the list. You will still need to click Apply to
completely remove the item from the database.
Fill A range of name cells may be filled with consecutive numerical data. For example,
VTR1 to VTR4 may be entered quickly by defining a prefix (in this case VTR) and
a suffix that will numerically increment.
Selecting Fill from the Insert toolbar, a dialog displays prompting you to enter a
prefix (alphanumeric) and the start/end numerical values.
This method adds rows to the destination table inserting below the active row.
Fill & Replace Enables you to overwrite a range of cells in the table. Rows beneath the currently
active row are overwritten with data from the Fill & Replace dialog.
Insert Above Inserts a new row above the currently active row in the table. Any existing data is
moved down the table by one row.
Insert Below Inserts a new row below the currently active row in the table. Any existing data is
moved up one row.
Insert Series Inserts a sequential range of labels below the currently selected row.
Paste Pastes the copied cell data from the clipboard. In some interfaces, such as in the
Salvo tab, the copied salvo settings are pasted in entirety.
Paste Below Pastes the copied cell data, from the clipboard, to currently selected cell.
Rename When working in an interface with lists on the left toolbar, clicking this button
enables you to provide a different name/label to the selected item.
Reset All IDs Resets the source/destination ID numbers based on their current row number.
It is recommended to verify the interfaces that referenced IDs (such as Soft Panels,
Salvos, etc.)
a. Ensure the ID numbers are correctly sequenced when deleting and inserting entries in the tabs.
Refer to the Reset All IDs row in this table.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 217

 Find Dialogs
Table 19.37 summarizes the buttons displayed in the Find dialogs.
Table 19.37 Find Dialogs Items
Item Description
Column A pull-down menu that lists the columns available in the current interface. Select
the column to perform the search within.
Find What: Specifies the characters, or text, to search the table contents.
Direction Begins the search by searching below the currently selected row (Down), or above
the selected row (Up).
Match whole word only Select the check box to search only for the characters in the Find What: field as
they are typed in the field. For example, typing “put” will search for instances of
the word “put” and not “input” or “output”.
Cancel Cancels the search criteria and closes the Find menu.
Find Performs a search through the table contents based on the specified criteria.

Advanced Fill Tool

The Advanced Fill tool is provided to create new destination and source labels that are automatically assigned to
physical outputs and inputs depending on options set by the user. The audio routing features provided by the routers
in your system can result in an extensive source and destination definition map requiring some time to manually
enter. The Advanced Fill tool will speed the assignment of physical sockets greatly.
For More Information on...
• using the tool to set up your database, refer to the section “Using the Advanced Fill Tool” on page 75.

Breakaway Fill Dialog

The Breakaway Fill dialog is the Advanced Fill tool for the Sources tab. This dialog is displayed when you click
Edit > Fill.

Figure 19.19 Example of a Breakaway Fill Dialog

218 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 19.38 summarizes the options displayed in the Breakaway Fill dialog.
Table 19.38 Breakaway Fill Dialog
Item Parameters Description
Fill Custom Insert labels with assignments for a custom range defined
by the Range setting
Entire Slot Insert labels with assignments for a single router slot
(including the AUX ports on the Ultrix router)
Entire Device Insert labels with assignments for the entire router
(including the AUX ports on the Ultrix router)
Name <text> The prefix for the label creation. For example, typing VTR
results in labels VTR1, VTR2, etc.
Take care when determining label names. While a long
name may be nice and descriptive for the Source tab, many
control devices have limited screen space and labels may be
truncated.
Starting # The starting numerical extension for the label creation. For
example, typing 3 results in labels Name3, Name4, etc.
Range # The quantity of labels for custom fill range
Slot # The Ultrix slot number to start the label assignment froma
Port # The Ultrix port to start the label assignment froma
Starting # The Ultrix channel to start the label assignment froma
Channel
Level # This column lists the levels defined as per user entries in the
system Levels setup table
I/O Assignment # This column lists the starting assignment for the given
Level row
Fixed Select the box to fix the I/O assignment selection even
though it may be out of natural order compared to other I/O
assignments.
For example, Ultricore.slot1.in[1].audio.ch1 and
Ultricore.slot2.in[1].audio.ch1.

BRK I/O Select the box to insert a label with this I/O assignment on
all BRK Level selections.
For example, IN 1 ch1 | slot1.in[1].audio.ch1 |
slot1.in[1].audio.ch1 | slot1.in[1].audio.ch1.

BRK Level Select the box to include this level when creating a
breakaway label. For example, IN 1 ch1.
BRK Suffix <text> By default, breakaway label naming uses the chx part of the
Ultricore name. A user defined suffix may be entered here.
Assign Click this button to automatically fill the I/O Assignment
column based on the Slot, Port, Starting Channel settings
to the selected row(s).

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 219

 Table 19.38 Breakaway Fill Dialog
Item Parameters Description
Apply Click this button to insert labels with assignments based on
dialog settings into the source assignment table below the
current selected row.
Cancel Click this button to cancel the settings and close the dialog.
No changes to the Source table will be made.

a. The Breakaway Fill dialog uses the default naming convention of FrameName.slot
n.in/out[p].type.chx.

Destinations Fill Dialog

The Destinations Fill dialog is the Advanced Fill tool for the Destinations tab. This dialog is displayed when you
click Edit > Fill.

Figure 19.20 Example of a Destinations Fill Dialog

Table 19.39 summarizes the options displayed in the Destinations Fill dialog.
Table 19.39 Destinations Fill Dialog
Item Parameters Description
Fill Custom Insert labels with assignments for a custom range defined
by the Range setting
Entire Slot Insert labels with assignments for a single router slot
Entire Device Insert labels with assignments for the entire router/device
Name <text> The prefix for the label creation. For example, typing VTR
results in labels VTR 1, VTR 2, etc.
Take care when determining label names. While a long
name may be nice and descriptive for the Destination tab,
many control devices have limited screen space and labels
may be truncated.
Starting # The starting numerical extension for the label creation. For
example, typing 3 results in labels Name3, Name4, etc.
Range # Specifies the quantity of labels for custom fill range
Slot # The Ultricore slot number to start the label assignment
froma
Port # The Ultricore port to start the label assignment froma

220 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Table 19.39 Destinations Fill Dialog
Item Parameters Description
Starting # The Ultricore channel to start the label assignment froma
Channel
Level # This column defines the levels as per user entries in the
system levels setup table
I/O Assignment # Starting assignment for the given level row
Assign Click this button to automatically fill the I/O Assignment
column based on the Slot, Port, and Starting Channel
settings to the selected row/s
Apply Click this button to insert labels with assignments based on
dialog settings into the source assignment table below the
current selected row.
Cancel Click this button to cancel the settings and close the dialog.
No changes to the Destination table will be made.

a. The Fill Destination dialog uses the default naming convention of FrameName.slot
n.in/out[p].type.chx.

Devices Interface
The Devices node summarizes the hardware components of the routing system. The nodes represent a hierarchy of
the routing system communicating with the Ultricore.

Frame Configuration Interface

The Frame Configuration interface is divided into four areas, each accessed by clicking the corresponding button on
the left toolbar of the interface.

Figure 19.21 Example of Frame Configuration Interface

Frame Information
Below the Frame Inventory table are the fields that report status information on the Ultricore hardware such as the
version of the system firmware and reporting the current date and time. From this area you can also specify the NTP
Server to be used as the time source for the Ultricore.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 221

 Licenses
Use the options in the Licenses area to manage the licensed features for your Ultricore. From here you can view
which licensed features are enabled, and enter license keys for new features.

Alarms
From the Alarms table you can specify what components the Ultricore monitors such as the SD Card, the chassis
battery, and the ENET ports.
By default, the Ultricore monitors the following components (these options in the Alarms table are enabled):
• SD Card Free Space
• SD Card Presence
• Battery
The Alarms table also displays read-only State column that reports the status of each enabled alarm using color
indicators which vary in severity from green (valid), yellow (caution), to red (alarm). For example, if the SD Card
status is set to red in the Alarms table, an SD Card is not detected or the SD Card not mounted correctly inside the
chassis.

Communication Settings
The Frame Communications area enables you to monitor the status of the Ethernet connections of the Ultricore.
From here you can verify the network settings of the active Ethernet port on the chassis, and view the mode of the
control system (primary/client).

Serial Ports
The Serial Ports area enables you to monitor the COM1 and COM2 ports on the Ultricore chassis. Each enabled
alarm using color indicators which vary in severity from green (valid), yellow (caution), to red (alarm).

Controllers and Matrices

Under the Controllers + Matrices node provides an inventory of remote control devices and routers that make up
your routing system, and have a defined connection to Ultricore.
• A Matrix is, generally speaking, a simple router consists of a matrix and a limited control system.
• A Controller is a complex router consisting of many matrices and its own control system.
Expanding the Controllers and Matrices reveals devices defined by rows in the Database Matrices tab. Double
clicking the node for the device opens the setup options for that particular device in DashBoard.
Ross Video devices that previously displayed in the Tree View as a sub-node of their IP connection point (i.e.
NK-NET or IPS), are now relocated to the Controllers and Matrices node of Ultricore once they are defined in the
Database Matrices tab. This indicates the device in question is now part of the Ultricore control system.

Panels
The Panels node provides a list of physical remote control panels within the routing system. For example, if you
have any RCP-ME or an RCP-QE setup in your system, each device would display as a sub-node under the Panels
node. Double-clicking the sub-node updates the DashBoard client window with the interface for that remote control
panel.

Soft Panels Interfaces

The Soft Panels interface represents the routing system crosspoint control in the virtual space of the Ultricore. Each
available soft panel in the database displays as a sub-node under the Soft Panels main node in a tree layout. The soft
panels display in a hierarchy based on their Panel ID. Double-click a soft panel node to display its interface in the
DashBoard window. There are three types of soft panels: Matrix, MultiBus, and Category.

222 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

  You must configure your connections, sources, destinations, and levels, before you can create a soft panel and
perform crosspoint switches.
For More Information on...
• creating a database for your routing system, refer to the section “Creating a New Database” on page 64.
• the interface for creating soft panels, refer to the section “Soft Panels Interfaces” on page 222.
• using soft panels, refer to the chapter “Soft Panels in DashBoard” on page 107.
• creating and using salvos, refer to the chapter “Using Salvos” on page 137.

Matrix Panel
The Matrix Panel provides a visual representation of multi-level crosspoints, in a grid layout, and offers a
convenient and easy way to select and switch crosspoints. The columns of the grid represent the configured Sources
and are labeled with the labels specified in the Input Name cells of the Sources tab. The rows of the grid represent
the configured Destinations and display the labels specified in the Destination tab.

Figure 19.22 Example of a Matrix Panel

Right-side Toolbar
Table 19.40 summarizes the buttons displayed in the toolbar on the right-side of the interface.
Table 19.40 Matrix Panel Toolbar Items
Button Description
Level # Each configured level in the currently active database is represented with a button.
When selected, the button is lit with the color assigned to the level. Crosspoint
selections on the matrix are also lit this color when the level is included in the next
switch.
Follow Automatically selects all the Level buttons listed on the Matrix panel (buttons are
now lit). All levels are now included in next crosspoint selection.
TAKE Performs a Take transition to the next crosspoint selection.
Lock Locks the Matrix panel from all switches or function button operation.
Protect Protects the currently selected source/destination level pair from use by other
sources, as well as from other linked panels.
Free Removes the Lock and Protect from the next crosspoint switch.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 223

 Table 19.40 Matrix Panel Toolbar Items
Button Description
Salvo Displays the options for managing the salvos for your soft panel. Refer to the
section “Salvo Menus” on page 224 for details.
Advanced Displays the options for managing crosspoint switches on your soft panel. Refer to
the section “Advanced Menus” on page 209 for details.

Salvo Menus
Table 19.41 summarizes the options displayed in the Salvo menu.
Table 19.41 Matrix Panel — Salvo Menus
Button Description
Recall Recalls and applies the last saved salvo settings.
Edit Enables you to load a salvo, update its settings, and then save your changes.
Save Saves the current crosspoint selection as a local salvo.
Capture Current Status Automatically creates a salvo based on the currently selected destination and
source positions.
Capture Dest Status Automatically creates a salvo based on the currently selected destination positions.

Advanced Menus
Table 19.42 summarizes the options displayed in the Advanced menu.
Table 19.42 Matrix Panel — Advanced Menus
Button Description
Clear All Presets Removes all selections currently made on the soft panel and returns the panel to its
default destination and source selections.
Clear Dest Presets Removes only the selections made on the Destinations bus. No destination buttons
are selected.
Diagonal Presets The destination and source crosspoint selections are automatically made starting at
the top left corner and progressively moving down the grid in a 1:1 pattern. For
example, Src1 and Dest1, Src2 and Dest2, Src3 and Dest3 etc.
R-Diagonal Presets The destination and source crosspoint selections are automatically made starting at
the top right corner and progressively moving down the grid in a 1:1 pattern. For
example, Src10 and Dest1, Src9 and Dest2, Src8 and Dest3 etc.
Setup Automation Automatically loops the crosspoint switches for the specified length of time.
Stop Automation Stops the automatic loop of crosspoint switches that was initiated using the Setup
Automation option.

MultiBus Panel
The MultiBus Panel provides breakaway control and status monitoring of several destinations simultaneously. The
MultiBus Panel interface is organized into two buses with a central status row of indicators for the levels. The
toolbar on the far left of the interface provides options for locking and protecting crosspoints, setting up the
transition, and selecting the levels. The bottom row of the interface is populated with buttons for the salvos defined
in the database.

224 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Figure 19.23 Example of a MultiBus Panel

Left Toolbar
Table 19.43 summarizes the fields and information displayed in the left toolbar of the MultiBus Panel.
Table 19.43 MultiBus Panel — Left Toolbar Items
Button Description
Lock Locks the MultiBus panel from all switches or function button operation.
Take Performs a Take transition to the next crosspoint selection.
Preset Enables you to configure a crosspoint switch that will not take effect until the Take
button is selected.
Clear Clears the selections in the crosspoint buses. No buttons are lit and the fields in the
Destination buses are blank.
Multi Select Enables you to assign a single source to multiple destinations for a multi-switch
configuration.
Level # Each configured level in the currently active database is represented with a button.
When selected, the button is lit with the color assigned to the level. Crosspoint
selections on the matrix are also lit this color when the level is included in the next
switch.
Follow Automatically selects all the Level buttons listed on the Matrix panel (buttons are
now lit). All levels are now included in next crosspoint selection.

Destinations Bus
Each Destination is represented as a distinct box on the top bus of the MultiBus Panel. Figure 19.24 provides an
example of a Destination bus. The Destination bus only displays the destinations specified when the soft panel was
configured.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 225

 Figure 19.24 Example of a Destination Bus on the MultiBus Panel

Table 19.44 summarizes the buttons displayed for each Destination in the MultiBus Panel.
Table 19.44 MultiBus Panel — Destination Items
Button Description
Name The Destination name/label is reported at the top of each area and displays as a
selectable button. This enables for quick identification on the bus when selecting
crosspoint switches.
The Destinations available on the bus is dependent on the database currently
loaded on the router and how many destinations were specified when the soft panel
was configured.
Level # This field reports the level(s) that the destination was associated with on the last
crosspoint switch.
Source # This field reports the source(s) currently selected on the Source bus located near
the bottom of the MultiBus Panel interface.
Lock Locks the Destination from all switches or function button operation.
Protect Protects the currently selected Destination from use by other sources, as well as
from other linked panels.

Sources Bus
Each Source is represented as a distinct button on the bottom bus of the MultiBus Panel. Figure 19.25 provides an
example of a Source bus. The Source bus only displays the sources, and in the hierarchy, specified when the soft
panel was configured.

Figure 19.25 Example of a Source Bus on the MultiBus Panel

Category Panel
There are two types of Category Panels: Classic and Group. Each Category Panel organizes the sources and
destinations according to the definitions set in the applicable Category interface for the database. The top toolbar is
used in conjunction with the central button matrix for selecting sources and destinations. The left side of the
interface provides access to level selection, and reports on the breakaway status with fields for each level. Some
functions are category type specific. Refer to the section “Using Category Panels” on page 125 for details.

226 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Figure 19.26 Example of a Category Soft Panel for an Ultricore

Ultritouch PB Panels
You can control an Ultrix router via Ultritouch by loading a saved soft panel using the Ultritouch hard panel
interface. Loading a soft panel to Ultritouch requires a similar method as loading a soft panel in the Ultrix and/or
Ultricore menu system. You select the device in the Ultritouch > All Connections interface, navigate to the specific
soft panel you wish to load, and select it from the provided list.

Figure 19.27 Example of an Ultritouch Soft Panel

For More Information on...

• the creating and using Ultritouch soft panels, refer to the Ultritouch + Ultricore User Guide.

Push Button Panels

The Push Button Panel interface is organized into four distinct areas. The top area displays the Destinations, the
middle row includes the Source buttons, and each area includes an independent method for filtering the buttons. A
toolbar displays on the right to provide access to the level buttons, and includes a status field. The bottom toolbar
provides options for locking and protecting crosspoints, setting up the transition, selecting salvos, and other
functions.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) DashBoard Interface Overview • 227

 Figure 19.28 Example of a (Landscape) Push Button Soft Panel

For More Information on...

• the creating and using Push Button soft panels, refer to the section “Using Push Button Panels” on page 129.

Using Walkabout in DashBoard

Walkabout is a Ross router utility operating within DashBoard, as of DashBoard version 6.2, that enables you to
configure the network settings for NK devices. Once a valid connection is established with Walkabout, the device is
listed in the Tree View of DashBoard and available for monitoring and configuration via DashBoard.
Ultricore supports a basic configuration mode via the Walkabout system for initial configuration of IP settings:
• specify device IP settings and names
• specify a name for your routing system
• specify the system role (e.g. primary, backup, device)
• select a system to join from a list of valid system names assigned to controllers
• set communications server from a list of valid communication server devices (or IP)
For More Information on...
• the features of Walkabout, refer to the Ross Video document Configuring Devices Using Walkabout.
• using Walkabout and Ultricore, refer to the section “Using Walkabout to Assign an IP Address to the
Ultricore Panel” on page 32.

228 • DashBoard Interface Overview Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Technical Specifications
This chapter provides technical information for Ultricore. Note that specifications are subject to change without
notice.

Ethernet Ports
Each Ethernet port uses a single 9-pin, RJ45 connector to interface with a local network, RCP-ME, RCP-QE, and
other devices that use an ethernet protocol for communications. The Ethernet ports are operated in a link aggregated
or bonded configuration to provide failover functionality.

Specifications
Table 20.1 Technical Specifications — Ethernet Ports
Item Specifications
Standards Accommodated 1000BASE-T (GbE) network
Connection RJ45

ALARM Connector
The ALARM connector on the Ultricore rear panel is used to configure alarm during loss of power to the panel.

Specifications
Table 20.2 Technical Specifications — GPO Alarm Port
Item Specifications
Alarm Mechanical relay normally closed output
Connection 3-pin header

Pinouts
Refer to Figure 20.2 and Table 20.3 for the pinout assignment of the ALARM port on the Ultricore rear panel.

321

ALARM
Figure 20.1 ALARM Connector on Ultricore Rear Panel — Pinouts Assignment

Table 20.3 GPO Alarm Pinouts

Pin Number Function
1 Ground

2 Alarm Output

3 +5VDC 22mA max.

Refer to Figure 20.2 for the signal pinouts for the 3-pin connector plug.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Technical Specifications • 229

 Connector Connector Connector
Side View Top Views End View

Connector

Tie Wrap
(without cable)
Cable

Figure 20.2 Connector Plug — Pinouts for GPO Alarm Port

Serial Ports
The COM 1 and COM 2 ports on the Ultricore rear panel are used to connect to a third-party device that
communicates via a supported serial protocol.

Specifications
Table 20.4 Technical Specifications — Serial Ports
Item Specifications
Standards Accommodated RS-232/RS-422 (switchable) serial
Maximum Baud 115200
Connection DB9 female

Pinouts
This section outlines the signal pinouts for the two COM ports.

Figure 20.3 Pinouts for Serial Ports

Table 20.5 Serial Pinouts

RS-232 RS-422
Pin Number Function Function
1 N/C N/C

2 Tx -Rx

3 Rx +Tx

4 N/C N/C

5 Ground/shield Ground/shield

6 N/C N/C

7 N/C +Rx

8 N/C -Tx

9 N/C N/C

230 • Technical Specifications Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 T-Bus Ports
The T-Bus ports on the Ultricore rear panel are used to connect to NK Series devices that communicate via the
T-Bus protocol.

Specifications
Table 20.6 Technical Specifications — T-Bus Ports
Item Specifications
Standards Accommodated Ross Video proprietary T-Bus
Cabling Type CAT3 or better
Connection 8P8C modular jack

Pinouts
This section outlines the signal pinouts for the two T-Bus ports.

Figure 20.4 Pinouts for T-Bus Ports

Table 20.7 T-Bus Pinouts

Pin Number Function
1 Ground

2 Ground

3 +Tx/Rx

4 N/C

5 N/C

6 -Tx/Rx

7 +15 VDCa

8 +15 VDCa
a. 7W total for both ports and not 7W each.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Technical Specifications • 231

 Power
The two power ports on the Ultricore rear panel deliver AC power.

Table 20.8 Technical Specifications — PSU

Item Specifications
Output 15VDC @ 4A
Output Power 60W
Input 100-240V~, 50-60Hz, 1.5A

232 • Technical Specifications Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 Software Licenses
This chapter provides third-party software license information for your Ultricore. This product includes multiple
software components which are individually licensed under one or more of the following licenses included in this
chapter.

BSD
Copyright (c) 1991,1993, The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Kenneth Almquist.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.

3. <BSD Advertising Clause omitted per the July 22, 1999 licensing change ftp://ftp.cs.berkeley.edu/pub/4bsd/README.Impt.License.Change> California, Berke-
ley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CON-
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABIL-
ITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Dual GPL
Portions of this software are copyright (C) 1996-2002 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

This project is also covered under the GPL v2.

GPL
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
Preamble

The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.

The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Pub-
lic License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free
Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply
it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distrib-
ute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces
of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if
you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission
to copy, distribute and/or modify it.

For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL
requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions.

Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is funda-
mentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for indi-
viduals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Software Licenses • 233

 such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the
freedom of users.

Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose
computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the
GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

0. Definitions.

"This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.

"Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.

"The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and "recipients" may be individuals or
organizations.

To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The
resulting work is called a "modified version" of the earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.

A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.

To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copy-
right law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available
to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.

To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network,
with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.

An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices" to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an
appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey
the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in
the list meets this criterion.

1. Source Code.
The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source form of a work.

A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a partic-
ular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.

The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Compo-
nent, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface
for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A "Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, win-
dow system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code inter-
preter used to run it.

The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code
and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally
available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes
interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is spe-
cifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work.

The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source.

The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.

2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License
explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output,
given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.

You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey
covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided
that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for
you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material out-
side their relationship with you.

Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary.

3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.

No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright
treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures.

When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by
exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of
enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.

4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.

234 • Software Licenses Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each
copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code;
keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.

5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.

You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:

a. The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.
b. The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions
added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to "keep intact all notices".
c. You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a
copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole
of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to
license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received
it.
d. If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the
Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make
them do so.
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not com-
bined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting
copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggre-
gate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.

6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.

You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source
under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:

a. Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium),
accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for
software interchange.
b. Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium),
accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or
customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of
the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable
physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost
of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a
network server at no charge.
c. c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the
Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you
received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b.
d. d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer
equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge.
You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to
copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated
by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions
next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the
Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy
these requirements.
e. e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the
object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge
under subsection 6d.
A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the
object code work.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Software Licenses • 235

 A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes,
or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor
of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status
of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless
of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.

"Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified ver-
sions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued func-
tioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.

If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which
the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized),
the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor
any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).

The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has
been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modifica-
tion itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.

Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an
implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.

7. Additional Terms.
"Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that
are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional
permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License
without regard to the additional permissions.

When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permis-
sions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a
covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supple-
ment the terms of this License with terms:

a. Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License;
or
b. Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the
Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or
c. Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such
material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
d. Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
e. Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
f. Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or
modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these
contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it,
contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a
further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document,
provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.

If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files,
or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.

Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either
way.

8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11).

However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright
holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior
to 60 days after the cessation.

Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means,
this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
your receipt of the notice.

Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights
have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10.

9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.

236 • Software Licenses Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a conse-
quence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to
propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work,
you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.

10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.

Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to
this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.

An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organiza-
tions. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the
work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.

You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, roy-
alty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging
that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.

11. Patents.
A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called
the contributor's "contributor version".

A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be
infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a
consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner
consistent with the requirements of this License.

Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale,
import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.

In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express per-
mission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commit-
ment not to enforce a patent against the party.

If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge
and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding
Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the
requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent
license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
country that you have reason to believe are valid.

If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent
license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent
license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.

A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or
more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is
in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which
the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered
work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered
work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.

Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under
applicable patent law.

12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.

If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the con-
ditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations,
then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom
you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.

13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU
Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the
covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combi-
nation as such.

14. Revised Versions of this License.

The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License "or any later ver-
sion" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.

If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of
a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Software Licenses • 237

 Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result
of your choosing to follow a later version.

15. Disclaimer of Warranty.

THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN
WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR-
TICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

16. Limitation of Liability.

IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY
WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE
OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POS-
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.

If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local
law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies
a copy of the Program in return for a fee.

238 • Software Licenses Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

 LGPL
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public License, supplemented by the
additional permissions listed below.

0. Additional Definitions.

As used herein, "this License" refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser General Public License, and the "GNU GPL" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public
License.

"The Library" refers to a covered work governed by this License, other than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below.

An "Application" is any work that makes use of an interface provided by the Library, but which is not otherwise based on the Library. Defining a subclass of a class
defined by the Library is deemed a mode of using an interface provided by the Library.

A "Combined Work" is a work produced by combining or linking an Application with the Library. The particular version of the Library with which the Combined

Work was made is also called the "Linked Version".

The "Minimal Corresponding Source" for a Combined Work means the Corresponding Source for the Combined Work, excluding any source code for portions of the

Combined Work that, considered in isolation, are based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version.

The "Corresponding Application Code" for a Combined Work means the object code and/or source code for the Application, including any data and utility programs
needed for reproducing the Combined Work from the Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the Combined Work.

1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL.

You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License without being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL.

2. Conveying Modified Versions.

If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application that uses the facility (other than
as an argument passed when the facility is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified version:

a. under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an Application
does not supply the function or data, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose
remains meaningful, or
b. under the GNU GPL, with none of the additional permissions of this License applicable to that copy.
3. Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files.
The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from a header file that is part of the Library. You may convey such object code under terms of your
choice, provided that, if the incorporated material is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, or small macros, inline functions and
templates (ten or fewer lines in length), you do both of the following:

a. Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the Library is used in it and that the Library
and its use are covered by this License.
b. Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license document.
4. Combined Works.
You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that, taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the portions of the Library contained in
the Combined Work and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of the following:

a. Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that the Library is used in it and that the
Library and its use are covered by this License.
b. Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license document.
c. For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during execution, include the copyright notice for the
Library among these notices, as well as a reference directing the user to the copies of the GNU GPL and
this license document.
d. Do one of the following:
1) Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, and the Corresponding
Application Code in a form suitable for, and under terms that permit, the user to recombine or relink the

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Software Licenses • 239

 Application with a modified version of the Linked Version to produce a modified Combined Work, in the
manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying Corresponding Source.
2) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that
(a) uses at run time a copy of the Library already present on the user's computer system, and (b) will operate
properly with a modified version of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Linked Version.
e. Provide Installation Information, but only if you would otherwise be required to provide such information
under section 6 of the GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is necessary to install and
execute a modified version of the Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the Application
with a modified version of the Linked Version. (If you use option 4d0, the Installation Information must
accompany the Minimal Corresponding Source and Corresponding Application Code. If you use option
4d1, you must provide the Installation Information in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL
for conveying Corresponding Source.)
5. Combined Libraries.
You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities that are not Applications and
are not covered by this License, and convey such a combined library under terms of your choice, if you do both of the following:

a. Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any
other library facilities, conveyed under the terms of this License.
b. Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
6. Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be sim-
ilar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU Lesser General Public
License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that published version or of any later version published
by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library as you received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser General Public License, you may choose any
version of the GNU Lesser General Public License ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License shall apply, that proxy's public
statement of acceptance of any version is permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the Library.

MIT
Copyright 1987, 1988 by MIT Student Information Processing Board.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted, provided that the names of M.I.T. and the
M.I.T. S.I.P.B. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. M.I.T. and the M.I.T.
S.I.P.B. make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

zlib
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler

This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this soft-
ware.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the follow-
ing restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original
software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the
original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler
[email protected] [email protected]
The data format used by the zlib library is described by RFCs (Request for Comments) 1950 to 1952 in the files ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc1950.txt (zlib format),
rfc1951.txt (deflate format) and rfc1952.txt (gzip format).

240 • Software Licenses Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Software Licenses • 241
242 • Software Licenses Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)
 Glossary
The following terms are used throughout this guide:
Breakaway — an act of performing a switch on only some of the signals grouped together under one label.
Connection Point — setting to define a communication connection between Ultricore and a device in the routing
system.
Crosspoint — a switch within a matrix. For example, the connection of signal IN 1 to OUT 1 requires one
crosspoint.
Destination — a signal output from the routing system.
IP Address — a setting that defines the Internet protocol address of a device within a network.
Label — text that is used by control displays to identify a signal as an input or output.
Level — refers to a section of a routing system. For example, a video router would be one level and an audio router
would be a second level.
Logical (virtual) Label — a name for a group of routing system inputs or outputs.
Logical (virtual) Routing — the action of switching a group of otherwise unrelated signals via a common label
(name).
Macro — a recorded sequence of Remote Control Panel operations (local to the panel).
Map — a table that defines the allocation of names (labels) to router input and output sockets.
Matrix — the part of the routing system that performs the actual signal switching tasks.
Partition — matrices may be partitioned to behave as smaller independent matrices.
Remote Control Panel (RCP) — a physical hardware panel of buttons that is used to control the routing system.
Resource — a source or destination of a router configuration; an external device providing some conversion
functionality for use within the routing control system.
Salvo — a system wide sequence of matrix control operations and crosspoint actions.
Soft Panel — a DashBoard interface that represents a panel of buttons that is used to control the routing system.
Source — a signal input to the routing system.
T-Bus — the Ross Video proprietary routing communication method via a defined physical interface.
Virtual Label — a name for a group of routing system inputs or outputs.
Virtual Routing — the action of switching a group of otherwise unrelated signals via a common label (name).

Ultricore User Guide (v15.0) Glossary • 243

244 • Glossary Ultricore User Guide (v15.0)